• Share
  • Email
  • Embed
  • Like
  • Save
  • Private Content
SAP BPC 430 (SAP BUSINESSOBJECTS PLANNING AND CONSOLIDATION: REPORTING AND PLANNING)
 

SAP BPC 430 (SAP BUSINESSOBJECTS PLANNING AND CONSOLIDATION: REPORTING AND PLANNING)

on

  • 3,378 views

SAP BPC 430 (SAP BUSINESSOBJECTS PLANNING AND CONSOLIDATION: REPORTING AND PLANNING) ...

SAP BPC 430 (SAP BUSINESSOBJECTS PLANNING AND CONSOLIDATION: REPORTING AND PLANNING)

IF YOU WANT MORE INFORMATION, PLEASE TELL ME.

SKYPE: BLINOVDANIIL
E-MAIL: BDANIIL@GMAIL.COM
URL: BLINOVDANIIL.COM

Statistics

Views

Total Views
3,378
Views on SlideShare
3,378
Embed Views
0

Actions

Likes
1
Downloads
524
Comments
0

0 Embeds 0

No embeds

Accessibility

Categories

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

    SAP BPC 430 (SAP BUSINESSOBJECTS PLANNING AND CONSOLIDATION: REPORTING AND PLANNING) SAP BPC 430 (SAP BUSINESSOBJECTS PLANNING AND CONSOLIDATION: REPORTING AND PLANNING) Document Transcript

    • BPC430 SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation: Reporting and Planning SAP BusinessObjects - Financial Performance Management Date Training Center Instructors Education Website Participant Handbook Course Version: 96 Course Duration: 5 Day(s) Material Number: 50106150 An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • Copyright Copyright © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. Trademarks • Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. • IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. • ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation. • INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated. • UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group. • Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®, VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. • HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. • JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. • JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape. • SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Disclaimer THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE, INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS CONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED SOFTWARE COMPONENTS. g20121711251 SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • About This Handbook This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study. Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used. Type Style Description Example text Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths, and options. Also used for cross-references to other documentation both internal and external. Example text EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and individual key words of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, for example SELECT and INCLUDE. Example text Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, and passages of the source text of a program. Example text Exact user entry. These are words and characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation. <Example text> 2011 Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics, and tables Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 iii
    • About This Handbook BPC430 Icons in Body Text The following icons are used in this handbook. Icon Meaning For more information, tips, or background Note or further explanation of previous point Exception or caution Procedures Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor's presentation. iv © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Contents Course Overview ............................................................................. vii Course Goals.................................................................................vii Course Objectives ...........................................................................vii Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview ...........1 Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components ........................ 3 Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in ..................................... 12 Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation ................... 57 Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in ......................................... 73 Using the Report Editor ................................................................... 75 Using The Member Selector ............................................................. 130 Working With Member Recognition ..................................................... 138 Linking Reports ............................................................................ 149 Formatting ................................................................................. 154 Multi-Source Reporting ................................................................... 178 Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports ...... 196 Using Delivered Templates ............................................................... 254 Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports .................................................... 258 Migrating EvDRE Templates ............................................................. 275 Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions .....297 Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard .......................................... 298 Using the Comment Feature ............................................................ 330 Using the Spread, Trend, and Weight Manual Planning Functions ................. 359 Unit 4: Business Process Flows .........................................................375 Creating Planning Business Process Flows ........................................... 376 Unit 5: Web Integration.....................................................................437 Using The Web Client ..................................................................... 438 Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces .................................. 448 Publishing Books .......................................................................... 467 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 v
    • Contents BPC430 Unit 6: Drill Through ........................................................................499 Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites ..................................... 500 Unit 7: Word and Powerpoint .............................................................531 Using Word and PowerPoint ............................................................. 532 Unit 8: Dashboards .........................................................................551 SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration ......................................... 552 vi © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Course Overview Target Audience This course is intended for the following audiences: • • • • • Application Consultants Project leaders Project team members Report writers Technical pre-sales Course Prerequisites Required Knowledge • Excel Recommended Knowledge • Experience with OLAP products Course Goals This course will prepare you to: • • • • • • • Describe the system components and integration. Report in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. Configure the EPM - Report Editor. Use the EPM functions. Configure the formatting template. Report in the Web Client. Use business process flows for planning. Course Objectives After completing this course, you will be able to: 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 vii
    • Course Overview • • • • • • • • • • viii BPC430 Describe the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation concepts and components. Work with the delivered templates. Use the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Set up and run the distribution and collection wizard. Set up and run drill throughs. Use Books to distribute precalculated static reports Work with the Word, and PowerPoint Interfaces of the EPM add-in. Build and use Dashboards for the purpose of integrating with SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. Configure the comments feature. Work with the EPM Functions. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit 1 SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview Unit Overview This unit will give you an overview of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, an introduction to the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in, and project implementation guidelines. Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • Explain the key terms Discuss the benefits of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Describe the components Identify the most important features of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Create an EPM add-in connection Describe the features of the EPM add-in ribbon Define default values for dimensions with the EPM Context Bar Build a simple report Discuss the implementation process Describe general business requirements for the planning and consolidation application Unit Contents Lesson: Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components ....... 3 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in .................... 12 Procedure: Connecting to a BW InfoProvider ............................... 19 Procedure: Enabling the EPM add-in ......................................... 20 Exercise 1: Report and Plan in the Excel Interface of the EPM Add-In .. 33 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 1
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Lesson: Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation .. 57 2 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components Lesson: Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn about the benefits of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation as well as the interfaces, the key terms, and components. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • Explain the key terms Discuss the benefits of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Describe the components Identify the most important features of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Business Example You are implementing the product and therefore need to familiarize yourself with the key features, the interfaces, and the components. The Key Terms In this section, you will learn some of the key terms. Key Terms Term Dimensions Master data such as companies and accounts Models Transaction data such as expense values and exchange rates Environments Contains dimensions and models, for example BW SAP Business Information Warehouse Properties Related fields such as currency Dimension Members Example: Company C1000 Base Level Members 2011 Definition Members with no children © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 3
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Prior Versions versus 10.0 (1) Terms Previous Term 10.0 Term Applications Models AppSets Environments Owner Performer DataSource Dimension Type Audit Trail Dimension Type Group Dimension Type Scope Dimension Type Live Reports Web Reports / Input Forms Dynamic Hierarchy Editor Ownership Manager Current View Context Member Access Profile Data Access Profile Apshell EnvironmentShell Validations Controls Note: The terms above apply to both platforms (listed below). (1) SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver (1) SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for the Microsoft platform Planning and Consolidation is part of Enterprise Performance Management 4 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components Figure 1: SAP BusinessObjects Portfolio with SAP Applications Regardless of which interface is used for reporting, the data comes from one central database. From there, you can retrieve data into four possible interfaces. The data is stored in InfoCubes for each model. The InfoCube is a star schema and comprises a fact table and dimension tables. Figure 2: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Architecture 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 5
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in can be used to access data from multiple sources such as Planning and Consolidation and Profitability Cost Management, for example. The data retrieval options are the same, regardless of the source. However, when used for the planning and consolidation application, additional features are available including data input and Data Manager, for example. Data Manager is used to import data and run planning functions such as copy, delete, and move. Figure 3: The Excel Interface of the EPM Add–In Note: The term “planning” above refers to the spread, trend, and weight functions that are used to disaggregate planning data. “Workbook collection” refers to the distribution and collection feature that can be used to distribute reports via e-mail, for example, or to collect planning data entered in Excel templates. The ease of use of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation has always been a key feature, along with the fact that data is stored in a central database and not in local spreadsheets. 6 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components Figure 4: The Value of Planning and Consolidation Business process flows (BPFs) provide the customer with a web-based launchpad, guided navigation, e-mail, and visibility of process status. Business process flows can be used to improve the coordination aspects of a process. Actions that are Open have an Action Required of To Perform. An action can only be performed if its preceding action is complete. That is why the Planning Functions action has the status Pending. The action status can also be changed via the Actions button. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 7
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 5: Process-Centric Since it is easy to use, IT does not always need to be involved in the configuration of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. 8 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components Figure 6: Set Up by IT - Owned and Maintained by Business Users The users Home workspace provides an easy to use Web interface. Figure 7: The Home Workspace 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 9
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 The Home tab provides a very convenient entry point for SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation users, and includes the following components: • • • • • • • • • • 10 Start Page - includes links to create reports and launch the Excel interface of the EPM add-in, for example Activities - activities the user is involved in Process Monitor - includes the status of processes Library - includes public and private reports, input forms, workspaces, and dashboards, for example Documents - this is a central storage location for important attachments Consolidation Central - the all-in-one interface for accountants Consolidation Monitor - used to execute closing activities and monitor progress Controls Monitor - used to execute data validation and monitor the results Journals - used to manage and create journal entries Ownership Manager - used to manage ownership data © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the key terms • Discuss the benefits of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation • Describe the components • Identify the most important features of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 11
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Lesson Overview This lesson shows you how to connect to the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in, use the EPM Context Bar, set user options, and work with reports and input schedules. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • Create an EPM add-in connection Describe the features of the EPM add-in ribbon Define default values for dimensions with the EPM Context Bar Build a simple report Business Example Now that your company or client has implemented SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, you need to learn how to work with the new EPM add-in. Overview of the EPM add-in In this section, we will learn about the EPM add-in and how to connect to it. The EPM add-in is an Office Add-in for Excel, Word, and PowerPoint. 12 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in has the following features. • EPM Data Retrieval • – Create reports – Analyze data – Dynamic formatting – Calculations – Charts – Print and share – Integration Planning and Consolidation Only – – – – Data input Planning functions Distribution and Collection Data manager The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in can be used for the entire EPM Suite: • • • • • • SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 MS - Business Planning and Consolidation SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 NW - Business Planning and Consolidation BOFC - SAP BusinessObjects Financial Consolidation SSM - SAP BusinessObjects Strategy Management PCM - Profitability and Cost Management FIM - Financial Information Management Types of Connections • • • Planning and Consolidation SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (BI) platform Local To access a specific InfoCube or model with the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in, you need to use a connection for a specific data source and a report. The Connections are managed in the Connections Manager dialog box. Using a Planning and Consolidation connection, the EPM add-in also enables you to enter data on SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation models. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 13
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 8: Data Connectivity Figure 9: Access SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation and BW Data Simultaneously You can use the EPM add-in to read data from both SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation and a BW InfoProvider simultaneously. 14 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Figure 10: Logging on from the EPM Tab Logging on enables you to establish an initial connection between all the workbooks (for one Excel instance) and an InfoCube or a Model. When you log on, you select the initial connection for the workbooks. The Logon dialog box proposes the default connection, if you have defined one. If it is left blank, you can click the ellipsis button and either select a previously defined connection or create a connection in the Connection Manager. The connection you select will then be considered the active connection. If you launch the EPM add-in from Planning and Consolidation Web Administration, you see connections for all the models for which you have security. Logging on to a connection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Use the Log on button to log on to a connection. The EPM Logon dialog appears. Click the ellipsis button to select a connection. Select a Connection and click OK Enter your user ID and password and click Logon. This dialog is bypassed when Single Sign On is configured. As an option, you can set any connection as the default by highlighting the connection and clicking Set as default. Opening the Connection Manager 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 15
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 On the EPM tab, go to Log on From Report Actions, go to Manage Connections Go to EPM pane → Active Connection → Select Another Connection Note: The EPM Pane will only display Select Another Connection once you have established a connection. If you need another connection, you can create one in the Connection Manager. There are various ways to call the Connection Manager. When you open Excel with the EPM add-in, you can call the Connection Manager by clicking the Log on button on the EPM tab and then clicking the ellipsis button. You can also call Connection Manager by selecting EPM → Report Actions → Manage Connections. Additionally, once you have established a connection, you can Select Another Connection from the Active Connection dropdown list of the EPM pane. The Active Connection is the connection for all the workbooks. Then, at any time, you can select another connection that will become the active connection for the current sheet. The Active Connection is used by default when a new report is built. Figure 11: Creating an SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Connection from the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 16 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Figure 12: Generating a Connection Name Figure 13: Access the EPM - Connection Manager from the Web Client Local connections are .oqy files. These connections can be stored on your machine or another machine on the network. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 17
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 14: Connecting to a BW InfoProvider 18 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Connecting to a BW InfoProvider 1. 2. From the Create Connection window, choose Local. Then, from the Local Connections dropdown, select SAP BW OLE DB Provider. Then choose Connect. 3. In the window, enter your system credentials and then choose Next. 4. In the EPM-Logon window, enter your user name and password and choose Log on. 5. In the Create New OLE DB Data Source window, choose $INFOCUBE and choose Finish. 6. In the Create Connection window, choose the BW InfoProvider from the Select the cube/model that contains the data you want dropdown box and then choose OK 7. 2011 In the EPM Connection Manager, choose Create In the Browse for Folder window, select the folder where you would like to save this local connection and choose OK © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 19
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Enabling the EPM add-in Use If the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in has been disabled, you can enable it by following the steps below: Procedure 1. In Microsoft Office Excel 2007, choose the Office button, then choose the Excel Options button. 2. In the Excel Options window, choose Add-ins. 3. Choose Disabled Items from the Manage drop-down menu and choose the Go button. 4. In the Disabled Items window, choose the SAP BusinessObjects EPM Solutions, Add-in for Microsoft Office and choose the Enable button. 5. Choose the Close button. The EPM Ribbon In this section, you will learn how to use the EPM add-in Ribbon. Figure 15: EPM add-in Ribbon 20 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in The EPM add-in for Microsoft Office contains an EPM tab with a ribbon. The EPM tab is the main entry point to perform reporting and data input actions. Depending on the Microsoft Office application (Excel, Work, PowerPoint), the EPM tab does not contain all the same commands. Note: When installing the EPM add-in, you specify the applications you use. For example, if you specified you would use Financial Consolidation, the Data Input group in the ribbon is not displayed since it is not relevant for this application. If you want to use Planning and Consolidation later on, you can display the commands that are related to Planning and Consolidation. When positioning your cursor on a command in the EPM tab, a tooltip appears, explaining the command. You can customize the ribbon. To display or hide the commands or group of commands in the ribbon, select EPM → Options → Command Display Options Figure 16: EPM - Command Display Options Depending on the connection type of the selected report, and the related features that are available, interface items are hidden or shown. Here, you define what interface items to hide or show. Your selections have priority over the visibility settings determined by the connection. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 21
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Connection Group Log on/off- Connect or disconnect the connections of the Workbook Reports Group Open - Open reports or input forms from Local folder or Server folder Save - Save reports or input forms from Local folder or Server folder Edit Report - Call up the EPM Report Editor New Report - Create a new report on the active connection Report Actions - Delete, copy or paste reports and manage connections View Formats - Open or close the EPM Formatting Sheet Refresh - Refresh the current worksheet. The data analysis group contains the following four options: Data Analysis Group Expand - Expand the selected member Collapse - Collapse the parent of the selected member Keep - Keep only the selected members Exclude - Exclude the selected member Undo Back: Undo up to the five most recent activities including: • • • • • • • • • • Expand (Excel only) Collapse (Excel only) Keep member (Excel only) Exclude Member (Excel only) Member Recognition Row and column axes switch EPM pane changes Report Editor changes Member Selector changes Data refresh Note: The Back navigation action will be available on a spreadsheet until you do something else on the same spreadsheet using Excel, or another EPM add-in operation on any spreadsheet. Its purpose is to let you immediately back out of a navigational action, layout change, or refresh of the cube that was done in error or gave you undesirable results. 22 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Data Input Save data - Save, refresh, and validate data. Change work status. Comments - Add and find comments Planning - Spread trend and weight functions Journals - Launch the journals workspace Collaboration Book publication - Publish precalculated workbooks to the web Distribution - Distribution and collection functions Portal publication - Publish to a BI launchpad Tools Drill through - Drill through to BW, ECC, or a Web site Quick links - Manage data, member, and report links Offline mode - Set the current workbook to offline Insert function - Launch the Excel Insert Function dialog box Options - Open the sheet, user, context, and command display options More - Freeze data refresh, access member properties, and so on Help About the EPM add-in Access the Planning and Consolidation online help The EPM Context Bar and the EPM Pane In this section, you will learn how to move, resize, and hide EPM Context and EPM Panes. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 23
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 17: EPM Context and EPM Panes The first time you use the EPM add-in, you must click the Show Pane & Context button on the EPM Ribbon to see the EPM Context Bar and EPM Pane. By default, the EPM Context bar is displayed horizontally, below the ribbon. The EPM pane is displayed vertically on the right side of the window by default. To move the EPM Pane or the EPM Context Bar: • • Use drag and drop or Click the dropdown arrow in the header and click Move. Then, move the cursor to the new position for the pane and click. To re-size the EPM Pane or the EPM Context Bar: • • Move a corner by dragging and dropping or Click the dropdown arrow in the header, click Size, move the cursor for the new size of the pane and click the pane corner To close the EPM Pane or the EPM Context Bar: • • Click the x in the corner of the pane. Click the dropdown arrow in the header, and click Close. To re-dock the EPM Pane or EPM Context Bar to their original position, double-click the Panes header. 24 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in To hide the EPM Pane or the EPM Context Bar: • • On the EPM Ribbon Tools group, select the Options → User Options. Go to the Others tab, and deselect the Display EPM Context Bar and Display EPM Pane checkboxes in the lower right-hand corner. Use the toggle button Show Pane & Context in the EPM Ribbon. (This will show or hide both panes.) Note: The Show Pane & Context toggle button will only work if you have your User Options set to display these panes. The EPM Context Bar In this section, you will learn about the features of the EPM Context Bar. The EPM - Context Includes: • • • The dimensions that are included in the current InfoCube / Model. The members that are used in the current display of an online report The saved members in an offline report Figure 18: The EPM Context 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 25
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 The context defines, for each dimension of a selected cube/model, a member corresponding to the default member to be applied. Dimension members that are selected in the axes of a report override the members selected in the EPM context and subsequent context pane changes will not be used to select data. Therefore, it might be prudent to hide or lock the dimension. Figure 19: EPM Context Lock tab Figure 20: Locked Dimensions are Grayed Out On the Context Lock tab, you can select, hide, or lock members for the EPM Context Bar. You can define this at the worksheet and at the workbook level. To lock a dimension on a workbook or worksheet, go to the EPM Ribbon and select Options → Context Options. In the Context Lock tab, select the level from the Context Level drop-down menu (workbook or worksheet), then click the member hyperlink of the dimension you are locking to open the Member Selector. Then, select the member you wish to lock the dimension with. The Lock checkbox is automatically checked for the dimension. 26 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in If you set the member at the workbook level, this affects all worksheets in the workbook. Figure 21: Member Selection: The Report's EPM Pane Takes Precedence Over the EPM Context You can also set a filter for a dimension by using the Page Axis in the EPM Pane. Caution: The members selected on the axes of a report override the members selected in the context. For this reason, you may consider hiding the dimensions if you choose to filter them in the Page Axis. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 27
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 22: The EPM - Context With Category Hidden Figure 23: The Context Display Tab 28 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Here, you define the EPM Context Bar options. The list of dimensions changes from one worksheet to another. In the Context Display tab, you define the display of the EPM Context Bar. You can specify display settings for the context by selecting EPM → Options → Context Options. The following options are available on the Context Display Options tab: • • • • Hiding Dimensions: You can decide not to display a dimension in the EPM Context bar by selecting the Hide checkbox. This checkbox is available on both the Context Display and Context Lock tabs. This is helpful if you have locked a dimension on the worksheet or if you decide to filter using the Page Axis and want to hide it from the EPM Context bar. Dimension and Member Name Display: The name of the dimension and the name of the member are displayed in the EPM Context bar by default. If you prefer to only show the member name, and not the dimension name, you can uncheck the Show Dimension Name option. Dimension Color: Colors are displayed by default in the EPM Context bar. You can choose not to display the colors by unchecking the Show Dimension Color option. Additionally, you can define the colors you want by clicking the colored area in the Color column and selecting a color from the palette. Dimension Order: You can modify the default order of the dimensions as they appear in the EPM Context bar by selecting a dimension and clicking the Up or Down button. The EPM Pane SAP BusinessObjects EPM solutions 10.0, Add-in for Microsoft Office (the EPM add-in) provides multiple ways to create a new report including: • • • • • EPM Report Editor Entering members directly in a sheet EPM Pane Report creation using copy and paste. Drag and Drop This section will show how to create a report using the EPM Pane. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 29
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 24: EPM Pane The EPM Pane is a graphic user-interface for defining a report. For all three report building options, any dimension member not specified in the report definition will be derived from the EPM Member Selector. In the Current Report area of the pane, you can drag and drop one or several dimensions to the following sections to create a report • • • Page Axis (Optional) Row Axis Column Axis As soon as you drag and drop at least one dimension in the row axis and one dimension in the column axis, the report with the selected dimension is displayed in the worksheet. However, this only occurs if the Defer Layout Update option is not checked, If you select the Defer Layout Update option, the Update button is enabled, which will prevent the report layout from being updated automatically each time a change to the axes section is made. 30 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in This can help improve performance when you are accessing a large amount of data. This will allow you to quickly add, move, and remove dimensions from the dimensions section to the axes sections. Then you can select Update when you are finished. By default, the member taken into account for a dimension is the one defined in the context, with the Member and Children relationship. Once a dimension has been added to an axis section, you can select another member for the dimension by clicking the dimension name that appears as a link. The Member Selector opens and you can select the member you want. When placing several dimensions on one axis, you can reorder the dimensions by selecting a dimension row (click to the right of the dimension link, not the link itself) and dragging and dropping it. This can also be accomplished by selecting a dimension, and using the dropdown. EPM Pane: Drag & Drop to Spreadsheet: You can also use the EPM Pane to build a report by dragging the dimensions from the Current Report area to the Excel spreadsheet. Figure 25: Highlight Report The Highlight Current Report option will color code the report based on the page, row, and column axis and current connection to the EPM solution. This option will be extremely useful for those worksheets that are complex with reports from multiple data sources. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 31
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 26: Select other members In this section you will learn how to create reports using drag and drop. 32 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Exercise 1: Report and Plan in the Excel Interface of the EPM Add-In Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Connect to the Excel interface of the EPM add-in • Use delivered templates • Configure user options • Create a template using drag and drop • Save templates • Use input schedules Business Example You need to use the EPM add-in to run some delivered reports, create your own reports, and enter some transaction data. Task 1: Create a connection and configure your user options. 1. Create a connection to the Expense model for your assigned environment. Open the native Excel, go to the EPM ribbon and log on. For NetWeaver, create a connection to the server with URL: http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes). Let the system generate the connection name. For MIcrosoft, create a connection to the server with URL: http://wdflbmt7121:1080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes). Let the system generate the connection name. Your environment will depend on which class you are in: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 33
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview Class BPC410_SMASTER BPC420 BPC420_## BPC430 BPC430_## BPC440 2. Environment BPC410 BPC430 BPC440_## Define your user settings to display the EPM context bar and the EPM pane. Hint: You may need to use the right arrow to scroll the EPM ribbon to the right. Note: If the EPM Context and Pane disappear, select EPM Worksheet under Options → Sheet Options. 3. Deactivate the display of dimension color. Note: If the EPM Context and Pane disappear, select EPM Worksheet under Options → Sheet Options. 4. Set your context members as shown below. Dimension Member ID - Description P_ACCOUNT PL400 - Indirect Expenses P_CATEGORY Plan - Plan P_COST DIRECT - Direct P_CURR LC - Local Currency P_TIME 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total MEASURES PERIODIC - Periodic Note: Measure is a dimension provided by the system that allows you to view period vs. cumulative data. 5. Practice the list vs. hierarchy display as well as filtering in the P_ACCOUNT member selector for the Calc Member Flag property. Continued on next page 34 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in To Practice Do This The List vs. Hierarchy display Choose the down arrow next to the field and select List Member Filtering by Properties 1. 2. Select the filter icon to display members based on their Calc Member Flag property. To deactivate the filter, choose the red X. Task 2: Use a delivered template to analyze data, modify the context member selections, and practice the drill down and back options to view the data at the level of detail you need. 1. Open the Dynamic Report with Nested Rows to view the data for indirect expenses. 2. Drill down to the months for Q1. Then use the Back option in the Undo panel. Hint: You may need to use the left arrow to scroll the EPM ribbon to the left in the next step. 3. Swap the axis. Task 3: Create a report via drag and drop, then save it to the company folder for later use. 1. In the Expense model, create a new workbook and use drag and drop to build a report with account by entity in the rows and time in the columns. 2. Define the P_ACCOUNT members as base members for the net income parent. Hint: You may need to maximize your screen. 3. Hide the empty rows. 4. Restrict the time members to Base Level for 2011 and the entity members to Member and Children for the TOTAL ID. 5. Save the report as the Account by Entity Trend ## in the Company REPORTS folder. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 35
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Task 4: Change the Account by Entity Trend ## report so you can input budget data. 1. Switch your P_CATEGORY context to Budget and deactivate suppression. 2. Switch the report to an input form and set the Keep Formula on Data option so that your formulas are not overridden. 3. Select Consulting for the rows. 4. Enter the following data for January 2011: Account Amount Personnel Cost 25,000 Travel and Entertainment 2,000 Advertising and Promotion 500 5. 6. Save your input template to the Input Schedules folder for the company as Account by Entity Input. 7. 36 Use cell formulas to add 5% for February to December and save the data to the database. Close Excel © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Solution 1: Report and Plan in the Excel Interface of the EPM Add-In Task 1: Create a connection and configure your user options. 1. Create a connection to the Expense model for your assigned environment. Open the native Excel, go to the EPM ribbon and log on. For NetWeaver, create a connection to the server with URL: http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes). Let the system generate the connection name. For MIcrosoft, create a connection to the server with URL: http://wdflbmt7121:1080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes). Let the system generate the connection name. Your environment will depend on which class you are in: Class Environment BPC410 BPC410_SMASTER BPC420 BPC420_## BPC430 BPC430_## BPC440 BPC440_## a) From your remote desktop, open the Start menu and choose Programs → Microsoft Office → Microsoft Office Excel 2007. Excel opens and displays a new worksheet. b) Goto the EPM tab, and choose Log On. The EPM - Logon dialog box is displayed. c) Next to the Connection field, choose the Ellipsis (...) button. The EPM - Connection Manager opens. d) Choose Create. Caution: If you are in the BPC410 class, select the Version for the Microsoft Platform type. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 37
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Use Server URL http://wdflbmt7121:1080/sap/bpc/ e) In the Server URL field, enter http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes) as shown below. Figure 27: Create Connection f) Choose Connect. g) If prompted, enter your user ID and password to create the connection. User ID BPC-## h) Password training Choose Logon. Environments and models are loaded. i) Use the dropdown box to select your environment and model. Environment Your assigned environment j) Model EXPENSE Choose Generate Connection Name. Continued on next page 38 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in The system generates a connection name made up of the model ID and environment ID. k) Choose OK→ select the EXPENSE - <Your Environment ID> connection→ OK. l) If prompted, enter your user ID and password to access your environment and model. User ID BPC-## m) Password training Choose Logon. The EPM pane appears on the right. 2. Define your user settings to display the EPM context bar and the EPM pane. Hint: You may need to use the right arrow to scroll the EPM ribbon to the right. Note: If the EPM Context and Pane disappear, select EPM Worksheet under Options → Sheet Options. a) Choose Options → User Options... Figure 28: Options b) Choose the Others tab. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 39
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 29: Options - User Options c) Confirm Display EPM Context Bar and Display EPM Pane are selected. d) Choose OK. e) Click on Show Pane and Context. The EPM Context and EPM pane both disappear. f) Click on Show Pane and Context again. The EPM Context and EPM pane both reappear. Continued on next page 40 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 3. Deactivate the display of dimension color. Note: If the EPM Context and Pane disappear, select EPM Worksheet under Options → Sheet Options. a) Choose Options → Context options. b) Deselect Show Dimension Color as shown below. Figure 30: EPM - Context Options c) 4. Choose OK. Set your context members as shown below. Dimension Member ID - Description P_ACCOUNT PL400 - Indirect Expenses P_CATEGORY Plan - Plan P_COST DIRECT - Direct P_CURR LC - Local Currency P_TIME 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total MEASURES PERIODIC - Periodic Note: Measure is a dimension provided by the system that allows you to view period vs. cumulative data. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 41
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview a) BPC430 Click in the EPM Context field for P_ACCOUNT, and choose Select Other Members... from the dropdown list. The EPM - Member Selector opens. b) Under Select member names to display (blue box to the left of the dropdown), select Description from the dropdown list. Hint: You may need to maximize your screen to see the OK button in the next step. Figure 31: EPM - Member Selector c) Expand Net Income and Operating Income → Select Indirect Expenses → Choose OK. Your P_ACCOUNT context is now set to Indirect Expenses. d) Use the same method to select your remaining context members as shown below. Continued on next page 42 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Figure 32: Ribbon with Context 5. Practice the list vs. hierarchy display as well as filtering in the P_ACCOUNT member selector for the Calc Member Flag property. To Practice Do This The List vs. Hierarchy display Choose the down arrow next to the field and select List Member Filtering by Properties 1. 2. a) Select the filter icon to display members based on their Calc Member Flag property. To deactivate the filter, choose the red X. In the EPM context field for P_ACCOUNT, choose Select Other Members... The EPM - Member Selector is displayed. b) Select the dropdown box next to Hierarchy and choose List. The accounts are now displayed as list not as a hierarchy. c) Choose Filter→ under Property choose Calc member flag→ under Operator choose =→ under Values choose Y. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 43
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 33: Select Other Members Under the Dimension Members you can see the parent account members. d) Choose Cancel to close the EPM - Member Selector. Task 2: Use a delivered template to analyze data, modify the context member selections, and practice the drill down and back options to view the data at the level of detail you need. 1. Open the Dynamic Report with Nested Rows to view the data for indirect expenses. a) In the EPM ribbon, select Open → Open Server Root Folder... Continued on next page 44 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Figure 34: Open Server Root Folder The Open dialog box is displayed. b) On the left of the dialog box, choose Company(Public) → Reports → Templates. c) Select DYNAMIC REPORT WITH NESTED ROWS. Figure 35: Open Dynamic Template d) Choose Open and after the report opens, choose Refresh from the EPM Ribbon Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 45
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 36: Dynamic Template Results The report opens and displays the most recent data. 2. Drill down to the months for Q1. Then use the Back option in the Undo panel. Hint: You may need to use the left arrow to scroll the EPM ribbon to the left in the next step. a) Double-click Q1 2011 to drill down to monthly data. Figure 37: Drill Down to Months b) In the Undo panel, choose Back. Continued on next page 46 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 3. Swap the axis. a) On the lower right, next to Column Axis, select Switch Axis. Now time is in the rows and accounts are in the columns. b) Choose Back. Task 3: Create a report via drag and drop, then save it to the company folder for later use. 1. In the Expense model, create a new workbook and use drag and drop to build a report with account by entity in the rows and time in the columns. a) Choose the Office Button → New. The Template dialog box opens. b) Choose Create or OK. c) From the EPM Pane, copy the dimensions to the cells specified below by drag and drop. Dimension Cell P_COST B4 P_ACCOUNT C4 P_TIME D3 Figure 38: Drag and Drop Initial Result You have created a new report. The row and column axis can be seen on the lower right. 2. Define the P_ACCOUNT members as base members for the net income parent. Hint: You may need to maximize your screen. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 47
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview a) BPC430 On the lower right on the Row axis, click P_ACCOUNT (in blue hypertext). The EPM - Member Selector is displayed. b) Select the Net Income parent by placing a checkbox to the left of the member. c) In Selection Relationship on the lower left, select Base Level. d) Choose the right arrow to move the selection to Selected Members. Net income base level members are moved to selected members and the prior selection is highlighted. e) Click the left arrow to remove the highlighted default selection. Figure 39: Member Selection f) Choose OK. The EPM - Member Selector closes and you have base level members for net income in the rows. Hint: If you receive a warning about the “Do not store environment” option choose the checkbox for Do not show this message again then choose OK. Then you will not receive this message again. Continued on next page 48 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in This option allows you to save a report without storing the connection with the report so you will be able to use this report with other connections for Models with the same Dimensions. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 49
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview 3. BPC430 Hide the empty rows. a) Choose Options → Sheet options. The EPM Sheet Options dialog box is displayed. b) Next to Rows select Remove Empty. Figure 40: Hide Empty Rows c) Choose OK then from the EPM ribbon choose Refresh Figure 41: Hide Empty Rows Result The empty rows are removed. Continued on next page 50 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 4. Restrict the time members to Base Level for 2011 and the entity members to Member and Children for the TOTAL ID. a) In the Column axis, choose P_TIME. The EPM - Member Selector is displayed. b) Select the 2011 parent by placing a checkbox to the left of 2011 (16). Note: This member has 16 descendants. c) In Selection Relationship on the lower left, select Base Level. d) Choose the right arrow to move the selection to Selected Members. Choose the blue left arrow to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. e) Set the display to Description. f) Choose OK. g) Use the same steps to display Member and Children for the P_COST dimension for the Total parent then choose OK. Figure 42: Time Base Members Your report now has months in the columns for the Direct, Support, and Total cost center groups. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 51
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview 5. BPC430 Save the report as the Account by Entity Trend ## in the Company REPORTS folder. a) In the EPM menu, choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. The Save dialog box is displayed. b) Choose Company (Public) → REPORTS. In the File Name field, enter Account by Entity Trend ##. c) Choose Save. Task 4: Change the Account by Entity Trend ## report so you can input budget data. 1. Switch your P_CATEGORY context to Budget and deactivate suppression. a) In the EPM Context for P_CATEGORY, left click Plan → Select Other Members. b) Select Budget → OK. c) Choose Options → Sheet options. d) Next to Rows select Keep All → OK. e) Choose Refresh. The report should display blank rows since no budget data exists. Continued on next page 52 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 2. Switch the report to an input form and set the Keep Formula on Data option so that your formulas are not overridden. a) Choose Options → Sheet Options. The EPM - Sheet Options are displayed. b) Select Use as Input Form. c) Choose the Refresh tab and select Keep Formula on Data. Figure 43: Keep Formula on Data d) 3. Choose OK→ Refresh. Select Consulting for the rows. a) In the EPM Pane on the Row axis, choose P_COST. The EPM - Member Selector is displayed. b) c) Choose the right arrow to move the selection to Selected Members. Choose the blue left arrow to remove the highlighted default selection. d) In Select member names to display, select ID from the dropdown list. e) 4. Expand Total → Expand Direct→ Select Consulting by placing a checkbox to the left of Consulting (0). Choose OK. Enter the following data for January 2011: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 53
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Account Amount Personnel Cost 25,000 Travel and Entertainment 2,000 Advertising and Promotion 500 a) 5. Enter the values as shown above. Use cell formulas to add 5% for February to December and save the data to the database. a) In E6, enter the following formula: =D6*1.05. b) Copy the formula and paste it into the cells E7 and E8. c) Copy E6:8 to F6:8 through O6:8. d) Choose Save Data → Save Worksheet Data. Figure 44: Save Worksheet Data The EPM - Submit Data dialog box is displayed. e) To send the data, choose Yes. The Save Results dialog box is displayed. f) Choose OK. g) Select cell E6 to check if the formula is still the cell. Continued on next page 54 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 6. Save your input template to the Input Schedules folder for the company as Account by Entity Input. a) In the EPM ribbon, choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. The Save dialog box appears. b) c) In the File Name field, enter Account by Entity Input ##. d) 7. Choose Company (Public) → Input Schedules. Choose Save. Close Excel a) b) 2011 Choose the Office button → Exit Excel Do not save any workbooks. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 55
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create an EPM add-in connection • Describe the features of the EPM add-in ribbon • Define default values for dimensions with the EPM Context Bar • Build a simple report 56 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Lesson: Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn about implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • Discuss the implementation process Describe general business requirements for the planning and consolidation application Business Example Your company or your client has purchased SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, so you need to learn how to implement it. Implementation Factors Every project has the following factors to consider: Figure 45: Implementation Factors 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 57
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 The Most Important Success Factors for BPC Implementations: • • Product expertise. A structured project delivery using best practices – – – Method Based Scoping (ASAP 7.1 BPC Add-on). Blueprinting Project Quality Assurance Note: ASAP Methodology for Implementation 7.1 has the add-on for BPC. Performance is a very important component in a project and it should be addressed right from the beginning of the project. Pushing the performance topic to the end of a project will, in most cases, cause delays in the project. Possible Reasons for Performance Issues: • • • Lack of data in the development system (reports were built on completely empty applications), so the performance of the reports could not be assessed up front (some dummy data should be generated in the development system) Lack of stress testing activities in the project plan, in a system with large number of concurrent users Design errors: An application, calculation, or report was designed in a way that they could not be high-performing Factors to consider Factor Project Objectives Define the project objectives. For example, implement cost center planning. Scope Determine the scope of the implementation. For example, the scope may only be for North America and Europe. Strategy 58 Example Define the project strategy. For example, perform most cost center planning using Planning and Consolidation. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Timeline Define both the timeline for the entire project and the implementation sequence. Sequence Determine the sequence of events from a project planning perspective. Resources Identify the internal project team members and consultants required. The Roadmap to Success SAP and its partners have implementation methodologies that are used to standardize the process. The roadmap includes the key steps in the process of implementing a solution. 1. 2. 3. SAP BI Strategic Decision: For the planning and consolidation application, you may need to decide whether to use an existing BW server or install a standalone server, for example. Pilot Project: A pilot phase may be beneficial to help determine your “to-be” solution. Project: Once your “to-be” solution has been determined, you proceed with the implementation. The Implementation Roadmap forms the methodical framework for the steps that you require to implement SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. It includes the necessary project management, the configuration for the business processes, as well as the technical features, the test procedure, and the training concepts. The methodology of the Implementation Roadmap supports the inclusion of those requirements that are used as the basis for installing the application. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 59
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 46: The Roadmap to Success • • • • • Project Preparation - initial project planning, project procedures, landscape strategy Business Blueprint - project planning, architecture Realization - configure the initial solution Final Preparation - test the solution, conduct training Go Live and Support - cut over to the new system, follow up on possible go live issues Below, you can see the recommended resources by phase. 60 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Figure 47: Method-Based Role Allocation BPC is a very versatile tool and can be used to cover many different business processes. A BPC Business Blueprint document can therefore look quite different, depending on the type of project and on the client as well. Due to the nature of BPC, there is not a single template that will fit all requirements. The blueprinting activity is a key activity in any BPC project. It is important not to underestimate the time required for this task (at least 20 to 30 percent of the total time of the project – depends on the availability of documented requirements). Prototyping is key for early user involvement and to prove designs. It reduces change management efforts during Go-Live Preparation (lean implementation model) Business requirements lie at the center of the project. The scope of your initiative must be driven by business requirements. A key ingredient is to gather accurate requirements in the information gathering process. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 61
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 48: Information Gathering Process • Preparation – • Identification of the interview / workshop team as well as the interviewees / attendees – Scheduling interviews/workshops – Communication of project goals, roles, and responsibilities Requirements analysis • – Use SAP-delivered business content as a first step to structure the analysis – Collect the business requirements, focusing on the processes – Find a suitable combination of interview and workshop techniques Matching • – Check user requirements against the business content – Identify gaps – Develop strategies to close gaps Presentation – – – Prepare and publish the results Find agreement on next steps Determine success criteria and risk factors Development Guidelines Here are some development guidelines to keep in mind. 62 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Figure 49: Development Guidelines • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2011 Naming guidelines - define naming conventions for all objects Responsibilities - define and communicate to each team member Authorization concept - build your security plan early in the project Global / Local data - identify data staging layers where you may have a corporate repository of Global data versus an application-specific set of Local data. Master data - identify where master data will be maintained Transaction data - identify where transaction data will be sourced Data flow - similar to the above but including transformations Data targets - in the data flow, identify where data will be stored BI objects - determine which BW objects will be involved in the data flow Data model integration - are there integration points between BW and Planning InfoCubes for example? EDW - do you need to use other Enterprise Data Warehousing solutions such as Informatica? Archiving - a life cycle strategy is important to reduce the storage of older data Initial data transfer - during start-up, how will the initial data transfer occur? Data handling - similar to the above, but also include possible transformation and mapping © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 63
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 • Operating concept / transports - where will new objects be created and how will the transport process work? Business content - during the gathering of business requirements, check to see if you can use any delivered business content Documentation - document why your solution and objects are built the way they are so that subsequent team members can follow what you did, for example Special topics • • • • • • • • • • List of all applications List of dimensions per application (and dimension type) List of properties for each dimension High level content for each dimension Description of internal data flows between applications Data sources for master data and transaction data Central / De-central data load Automatic / Manual trigger Full versus. Incremental load Technology used for data load (out-of-the box, development in ABAP, ...) • • • Requirements Analysis Gathering business requirements may be the most important part of a project, and the most challenging! 64 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Figure 50: Requirements Analysis • • • • • • Project focus - this should be done periodically since conditions change over time Interviews - conduct them with individuals or small groups to ensure that everyone has input. Collect information about the business process Workshops - use larger groups to do brainstorming Documentation - good documentation is critical to avoid miscommunication Gap analysis - compare as is with to be Reporting requirements - include planning and / or consolidation requirements Analysis Levels Granularity, along with storage of historical data, is one of the most important requirements from a performance perspective. Too much detail can cause performance issues later on. When gathering business requirements, it is critical to identify what level of detail is really needed. Similar data requirements include: • • • 2011 How soon do you need to have ECC data in BW? How much history do you need to store? When can data be archived? © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 65
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Figure 51: Analysis Levels Sample Business Requirements for a Planning Project 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 66 What type of planning do you perform and in which system? What level of detail? Who are the planners? What is a typical day in the life of a planner? Is there a service level agreement for performance milestones? (Example: reports must run in 30 seconds or less) What are the top-down and bottom-up requirements? Is it next year's tactical plan or the 5 year strategic plan? Are there offline scenarios? Do you need to track status and provide guided navigation? How will you lock approved data? When should we track who changes the data? Where is the actual data coming from? Do you need to replicate ECC Cost Center Planning, for example? What types of business calculations are needed? Etc. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Sample Implementation Steps for a Planning Project A planning project could involve the following steps. • • • • • • • • • • • • Gather the business requirements Compare as is with to be Consider delivered content Specify the required architecture Develop the data flow requirements Create the environment Create dimensions and properties Create models and set up security Set up Data Manager packages, logic scripts / BAdIs, business rules Update exchange rates Set up work status and a business process flow Create new reports and input schedules Note: BAdI stands for Business Add-In. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 67
    • Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Overview BPC430 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Discuss the implementation process • Describe general business requirements for the planning and consolidation application 68 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Unit Summary Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the key terms • Discuss the benefits of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation • Describe the components • Identify the most important features of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation • Create an EPM add-in connection • Describe the features of the EPM add-in ribbon • Define default values for dimensions with the EPM Context Bar • Build a simple report • Discuss the implementation process • Describe general business requirements for the planning and consolidation application 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 69
    • Unit Summary 70 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • Unit Summary 71 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit Summary 72 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit 2 The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Unit Overview This unit includes everything you need to know about the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2011 Use the EPM add-in Report Editor features, such as the Layout, Options, Sort, Rank, and Filter. Explain member relationships Describe expansions Efficiently control members displayed in result sets Create a report using Member Recognition Create a report using Local Member Recognition Use data links Use member links Use report links Work with the formatting style sheet to create more attractive reports. Create a workbook with two different reports from two different connections. Create two reports that share a row axis. Use EPM functions to pull in descriptions and properties into your reports Create reports and input forms from scratch Discuss the most important delivered EPM functions Perform smart variance calculations Use the time offset function Set up a push button Use delivered input schedules Use delivered reports © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 73
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in • • • • BPC430 Use EvDRE templates in the EPM add-in Describe the key features of EvDRE templates Identify how EvDRE features are provided in the EPM Reports Migrate EvDRE templates. Unit Contents Lesson: Using the Report Editor .................................................. 75 Procedure: How to Create a Report From the Report Editor .............. 85 Exercise 2: Data Analysis: Expand, Collapse, Keep, Exclude ........... 105 Exercise 3: Sorting, Filtering, and Ranking. ................................ 113 Exercise 4: Excluding and Renaming Members ........................... 123 Lesson: Using The Member Selector ............................................ 130 Lesson: Working With Member Recognition .................................... 138 Exercise 5: Member Recognition............................................. 141 Lesson: Linking Reports ........................................................... 149 Lesson: Formatting ................................................................ 154 Procedure: How to Format for Hierarchies.................................. 158 Procedure: Applying a Default Dynamic Formatting Template to a Worksheet ....................................................................... 163 Procedure: Applying a Default Dynamic Formatting Template to a Report ............................................................................ 164 Exercise 6: Apply Dynamic Formatting ...................................... 165 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting .................................................. 178 Exercise 7: Multi-Source Reporting .......................................... 183 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports ............................................................................... 196 Exercise 8: Using Basic EPM Functions .................................... 213 Exercise 9: Using Advanced EPM Functions ............................... 225 Exercise 10: Using VBA in Buttons .......................................... 245 Lesson: Using Delivered Templates.............................................. 254 Lesson: Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports ................................... 258 Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates ........................................... 275 Exercise 11: Migrating EvDRE Templates .................................. 287 74 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Lesson: Using the Report Editor Lesson Overview Set up reports and schedules. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • Use the EPM add-in Report Editor features, such as the Layout, Options, Sort, Rank, and Filter. Business Example Reporting is usually the most important feature of an application like this. In this unit we will go over all of the features of the most important reporting tool: the EPM Report Editor. Sheet Options Sheet Options apply to the current worksheet, with the exception of Refreshing data upon open and Clearing data upon save, which apply to the entire workbook. Sheet options can be accessed from the EPM Ribbon Options → Sheet options. Some of these options (noted in bold) are inherited into the Report Editor Options tab. However, note that, when in the EPM Report Editor Options tab, the Inherit Sheet Options checkbox can be deselected and some of these options can be overridden. Sheet Option - General tab Expand Options Data Input Allows you to enter and save data. Member Recognition 2011 Controls what type of member expansion occurs on an Expand. For example: Member and Children Allows you to enter members directly in a cell of a report. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 75
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Totals Placement Allows you to control where the totals are displayed. For example: Top or Bottom Empty Data Behavior Allows you to define what happens to cells with no data. Options are : Keep, Hide, Remove Comments retrieved by EPM Functions Allows you to display EPM comments for a cell when you mouse over Sheet Option - Formatting tab Row Header Indentation You can indent children, parents, or choose no indentation Set Default in empty cell Allows you to define a value for empty cells. Example: N/A Calculate Parents in Hierarchies The data in the report is replaced with a sum formula for parents. Display name Can choose between Caption or Full Unique Name. Auto Fit Column Width After any refresh, the application will change the width of all columns to accommodate the largest entry. Repeat Row and Column Headers In a nested axis, repeats the outer dimension members. Sheet Option - Refresh tab Keep Formula on Data Show Source Data in Comments If you keep the formula upon refresh, you can have the source data be displayed as a comment. Calculate Parents in Hierarchies 76 Allows a formula defined in a cell to remain when you refresh. The data in the report is replaced with a sum formula for parents. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Refresh data in the Whole File upon Open Upon open, all reports within the workbook will be refreshed. Clear data in the Whole Upon save, all data is cleared from the reports after it is File upon Save saved. Show Unauthorized Cell text For unauthorized values, text defined in the User Options is displayed instead of blanks. (NetWeaver Platform only) The Five Options to Create Reports • • • • • EPM Report Editor Entering members directly in a sheet EPM Pane Report creation using copy and paste Drag and drop In this lesson, we will show how to create a report using the EPM Report Editor. The EPM Report Editor can be used to: The Report Editor can be used to: • • • • • Create a Report Define specific options for a report Sort, filter and rank Create customized names for members Exclude members The EPM Report Editor is the graphic user-interface for defining or changing a report or input schedule. In this unit, we will cover the key features of the Report Editor. Building a report with the Report Editor Layout tab In this section, you will learn how to create a report within the layout tab of the Report Editor. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 77
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 The Report Editor Layout tab: • • • • • Create a report on a blank worksheet. Create a report on a worksheet already containing a report. Arrange the layout of the report. Access the member selector. Define report position. To build a report using the Report Editor, choose New Report or Edit Report on the EPM add-in ribbon. Figure 52: Opening the EPM Report Editor The EPM Report Editor window opens, displaying the Layout tab by default. Figure 53: EPM - Report Editor Layout Tab 78 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor The left hand side shows the Dimensions area while the right hand side shows the different Axes. You can perform drag and drop operations between the three axes and the Dimensions area. Additionally, the Report Editor allows you to control the position of the report and axes. You can move the report in the sheet by choosing one cell. The cell displayed in the middle of the four blue arrow buttons corresponds to the top left cell of the data grid. You can change it by entering the cell reference or using the arrow buttons. You can also use the Report Editor to insert a separation between the data grid and the row or column axis by using the Shift area. As an alternative to drag and drop, you can use the context menu. • • • • In the dimension list section, you can use the context menu to add the selected dimension to the Page, Row or Column Axis. In the Row and column axes areas, provided you have more than one dimension, you can use the context menu to move the dimensions up and down. In the Page Axis area, you can click the Change Cell command to select the cell where you want the dimension member to display. Each dimension in the page axis can be positioned individually. In the page, row, and column axes areas, you can use the context menu to: – – Select members for the selected dimension by choosing Select Dimension Members which will open the Member Selector. Move the dimension to another axis . – Remove the dimension from the axis. To remove all dimensions from the layout, choose Reset Report. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 79
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 54: The Layout of a Report The Page Axis is optional. As page axis dimension member values apply to the entire report, you can use this axis as a header to filter the data of your report. You can use one or several dimensions in the page axis. For each dimension, you can select one or several members. If you select several members in a page axis dimension, report data is summarized for the selected members. The Row and Column Axis are mandatory. Each axis can contain one or several dimension members (nesting). The Data Grid contains values from the database. There are some basic Report Layout Rules, which must be followed so that the EPM add-in can interpret the data. • • • • • • • 80 The Page Axis must appear above the Column Axis. At least one row should be inserted between the Page Axis and the Column Axis. The Column Axis must be above the Row Axis. A Dimension can only appear once in the layout. There cannot be a blank column in between nested dimensions of a Row Axis. There cannot be a blank row in between nested dimensions of a Column Axis. All inner dimension's members must be stated when an outer dimension contains a member. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Figure 55: Page Axis Layout Rules: Blank row between Page Axis and Column Axis Below you can see three examples of the Row Axis, two of which are incorrect. The Nesting 2 example is incorrect because the inner dimension member, the account, is not stated. The Nesting 3 example is incorrect because there is a blank column between the two dimensions. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 81
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 56: Row Axis - Layout Rules Below, you can see three examples of the Column Axis, two of which are incorrect. The Nesting 2 example is incorrect because the inner dimension member is not stated. The Nesting 3 example is incorrect because there is a blank row between the two dimensions. 82 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Figure 57: Column Axis - Layout Rules Blank rows or columns between members are allowed. As are local excel formulas. Figure 58: Report Layout Possibilities By default, a report is created on the Active Connection of the worksheet. The Active Connection can be displayed on the EPM Pane and on the Report Editors' Layout tab. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 83
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 59: EPM Cell Context Menu In Microsoft Excel, a cell context menu appears when you right-click any cell in the spreadsheet. The add-in adds one menu item to the top of the context menu: EPM. This allows you to continue to use the existing Excel features while still having access to some EPM add-in actions. 84 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor How to Create a Report From the Report Editor 1. From the EPM add-in ribbon, choose New Report or Edit Report. The EPM - Report Editor window will display on the Layout tab by default. 2. If you want a filter the report data, drag and drop the one or more dimensions to the Page Axis. Click the dimension to call the EPM - Member Selector window. Choose the member/members for the filter and choose OK. 3. On the Layout tab, drag and drop one or several dimensions to the Row Axis. 4. On the Layout tab, drag and drop one or several dimensions to the Column Axis. 5. Optional: On the bottom right hand side of the EPM - Report Editor window, you can decide the position of the top left cell of the data grid. 6. Optional: A shift between the data grid of the report and its row and column headers can be defined. To do so, enter a number greater than 1 if the Row Axis should remain to the left of the Column Axis. Enter a number less then 0 if the Row Axis should appear to the right of the Column Axis. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 85
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 EPM - Report Editor: Options You can perform actions and specify some options that are specific to the current report by using the Options tab in the Report Editor. Figure 60: EPM Report Editor - Options By default, the report options are inherited for the current worksheet from the Sheet Options. Since we have already covered the Sheet Options, let us cover the options not related to those. • • 86 To keep the options as defined in the Sheet Options, leave the Inherit Sheet Options checkbox selected. All options inherited from the Sheet Options are grayed out. To modify the options for the current report, deselect the Inherit Sheet Options checkbox. All the options are made available for selection. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Options not related to the Sheet Options: • Freeze Data Refresh: For Planning and Consolidation connections, this option will allow you to navigate in a report without having data loaded from the data source. When you are finished navigating in the report, you can activate the refresh and retrieve the latest data. Note: This option is also available in the User Options • Freeze Data Save: For Planning and Consolidation connections, this option will deactivate the data save for a specific input form. When you are sure of the data you want to save, you can activate again and save the data. Do not Store Connection: For Planning and Consolidation connections, this option will allow you to save a report without storing the connection used to create the report. • Note: Since the connection is not stored, the dimensions are identified by their types (for example, E for Entity) and not by their names. Members are identified by their relationships and not with their names. • Display on Base Level Data: For Planning and Consolidation connections, version for the Microsoft platform connections only, this option will only display the data that is not aggregated. The data calculations will not be performed and the data for base level members will be displayed quicker. Refresh Options EPM Button Action Refresh - Select Report To update a selected report Refresh - Worksheet Refresh - Workbook To update a sheet of the EPM Workbook To update the EPM Workbook Refresh - Selected Data To update selected data On the EPM Ribbon, there are various sheet options. You can choose to refresh the report, a sheet of the Workbook, the entire workbook, or just some of the data. Sorting In this section you will learn about sorting the data of the current report. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 87
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 61: EPM Report Editor - Sorting You can sort the data in your report in ascending or descending order based on: • • • A specified dimension member for each column in the column axis The first column The last column Below you can see the Sorting options. 88 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Figure 62: Sorting Options The Sort Inside Level option enables you to sort parent members and their children in each level of the hierarchy, while still preserving the hierarchy. This option is only available if there is one dimension in the row axis. Filtering You can filter the data of the current report using the Report Editor. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 89
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 63: Filtering You can specify one or more conditional dimension member value filters on the report. Only the members that meet the filtering criteria will be displayed in the report results. However, you have the following additional functionality to meet your business requirements: 90 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Figure 64: Filtering Example - Keep Blocks • • Retain Members: This option allows you to select one or more specific members that you want to display in the report whether or not they meet the filtering criteria. Keep Blocks: If a member meets the filtering criteria, all the members of the block to which it belongs are displayed. Note: This option only appears if there is more than one dimension in the row axis. • When both Retain Members and Keep Blocks are selected: When retaining a member, not only that member is retained, but all members of that members block are as well. Ranking In this section, you will learn about ranking the data of the report. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 91
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 65: EPM Report Editor - Ranking You can specify top or bottom N ranking based on a specified dimension member. If there is more than one dimension in the column axis, you can select one member for each dimension. If you also define a filtering on data on the Filtering tab, to avoid conflict, the filtering takes precedence over the ranking. (The Perform Filtering, then Ranking checkbox is set on the Filtering tab by default). If you prefer, you can select the Perform Ranking, then Filtering option on the Ranking tab. This will deselect the Perform Filtering, then Ranking checkbox on the Filtering tab. 92 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Figure 66: Ranking Example - Top 2 Read Only Data In this section, you will learn about the report editor Read Only Data feature. You can use this feature to prevent data input. If this setting is turned on in an input form, the user will receive a No data to refresh message if they try to save to the data base. • • Specific base level members. The intersection of specific members. Below, you can see an example which will prevent sending data for the Actual and Personnel Expense intersection: 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 93
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 67: Read Only Intersection Setting Below, you can see the system message if the user tries to enter data: Figure 68: Read Only Intersection Error Message This is one of several ways to control data input. 94 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Options to Prevent Data Entry in General • • • • Data access profiles Work status Read only data setting Formatting The data access profiles option should be used when you need a global static control. Work status should be used if you need a more flexible solution. The Read Only Data and formatting options should be used when you need a workbook-specific solution. Local Members In this section, you will learn about the report editor Local Members feature. You can create members mainly for calculations on the current report. These members are called "local members". Local members have the same behavior as any other member, but they contain standard Microsoft Office Excel formula or EPM functions. There are two ways of creating local members: • • Enter an Excel formula. Create a local member in the Report Editor. When the Member Recognition is activated, all Microsoft Office Excel formulas are automatically converted into “local members”. You can then view and modify the local member in the Local Members tab of the Report Editor. Below, you can see an example where the user entered a simple formula that calculates the difference between budget and actual: Figure 69: User Formula 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 95
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 If you do not enter a text to describe the local member, a default name is generated, beginning with (fn). Below, you can see the definition of the local member created by the system: Figure 70: Local Member Definition Below, you can see an example of how you can insert rows and columns in a report, as well as your own formulas, and still work with live data. Figure 71: Example With Formulas 96 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor There are many things that you can add in and around the data grid to form a custom formatted report with additional calculations. The example above demonstrates several things that you can do that will not prevent you from re-refreshing it with the application. Note that the unusual text and background formatting is only used here to help you differentiate the areas of the report. Local members are specific to the current report. If you want to reuse a local member in other reports for the same sheet/connection couple, you can convert the local member into a custom member. To convert a local member into a custom member, right-click the local member in the report and select EPM → Convert to Custom Member. You can create custom members only when using a local or SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise connection. Precedence rules: in case of conflicts between local members on the row and column axes, local members on the columns axis override the ones on the row axis. You can apply a specific formatting to local members. You can also create a grouping local member in the Member Selector, when grouping members by property. Member Names Figure 72: Customizing Member Names 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 97
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Within a report, you can customize the name of any dimension member. This name will override the name of the member coming from the cube or model. You will see this customized name in both the report results and the EPM - Member Selector Excluded Members For a specific report, you can choose not to display specific members. Figure 73: Excluding Members Members can be excluded from the EPM - Report Editor or by selecting the member and choosing Exclude from the EPM Ribbon. By selecting the Exclude button from the EPM Ribbon, the Excluded Members tab of the EPM - Report Editor is automatically updated. This is a persistent exclusion, meaning when the report is refreshed, this member will still be excluded. Member Insertion Filtering In this section, you will learn about the report editor Member Insertion Filtering feature. 98 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor For a specific report, you can create filters to restrict the member selection list when using the Insert Members function. You create the filters in the Member Insertion Filtering tab of the Report Editor. Select a dimension, then click Edit Filter. In the Member Selector that opens, select the members that will be possible to insert in the current report. You can modify the filter by clicking Edit Filter or you can delete it by clicking Remove Filter. Once you have created a filter on a specific dimension, you will be able to insert in the report the members specified in the filter. Below, you can see an example of a filter which will only allow the user to insert base level members for advertising and water & energy. Figure 74: Member Insertion Filtering - Definition Below you can see the dialog that you can use to insert new members. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 99
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 75: Insert New Members Data Analysis: Expand, Collapse, Keep, Exclude The EPM add-in has various features for Data Analysis. Below you can see the Expand options. 100 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Figure 76: Expand Options The Expand command on a member drills down in the data grid. What is drilled down is dependant upon the expansion relationship behavior chosen in the expand button list. You may select the default behavior in the Sheet Options. Additionally, in the User Options if you Enable Double-Click you can perform an expansion by double clicking the member in your report. Figure 77: User Options affecting Data Analysis 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 101
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Note the following regarding the Expand feature: • • • • Expand will not work on a page axis dimension member. When the data sorting, ranking and filtering are activated, the expand works in the column axis only if the following options are selected: Member and Children or Member and Descendants When the data sorting, ranking and filtering are activated, the expand never works in the row axis. When the data sorting, ranking and filtering are activated, the way the Expand works also applies to the Collapse feature. Figure 78: Expand with Nested Axis Expansion with Nested Axis: When you expand within a nested axis' inner dimension, you can decide one of the following behaviors: • • All child members will be repeated for each member of the outer dimension. This is called a symmetrical expand. Only the child member for the selected member of the outer dimension will be displayed. This is called an asymmetrical expand. The expansion on an outer dimension is the same as a simple axis. Below you can see the Collapse options. 102 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Figure 79: Collapse Example The Collapse command will: • • Collapse to the parent of the child member selected in the report. Collapse to the selected parent member, when you double click a parent. Below you can see the Keep options. Figure 80: Keep Example 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 103
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 The Keep command will keep all occurrences of the selected members including all occurrences in an inner nested dimension. All other members are excluded. This works for either rows or columns. The Shift and Ctrl keys can be used to highlight multiple members for choosing the Keep Feature. Below you can see the Exclude options. The Exclude command takes away all occurrences of the selected members including all occurrences of an inner nested dimension. All other members are kept. This can be applied to either the rows or the columns. Figure 81: Exclude Example 104 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Exercise 2: Data Analysis: Expand, Collapse, Keep, Exclude Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • You want to learn how to work with the Data Analysis features on the EPM add-in ribbon. Business Example The users want a quick way to analyze different dimension members as they work with the data. Task: You will work with the Data Analysis options of the EPM add-in ribbon. 1. Create a connection to the Sales Model for your assigned Environment and make sure your EPM Context bar and EPM Pane are displayed. Open native Excel. Go to the EPM ribbon and Log On. Create a connection with server URL: http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes). Let the system generate your connection name. 2. Ensure the Sales Connection is selected. 3. Set your context: 4. Use the EPM Pane to create a new report. 5. Display only the IDs in the result set. 6. Set your defaults in the Sheet Options to expand to Children and the User Options to Expand/Collapse on Single Member and Keep/Exclude on Single Member. 7. Work with the Expand and Collapse features for 2009 Q1. 8. Work with the Keep feature for 2009 Q1. 9. Work with the Exclude feature for 2009 Q1. 10. Change your User options so that when you Expand, Collapse, Keep, or Exclude, you do so for all like members for that dimension. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 105
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 11. Use the Expand and Collapse features with the new User Options for 2009 Q1. 12. Use the Keep feature with the new User Options for 2009 Q2. 13. Save your Report. 106 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Solution 2: Data Analysis: Expand, Collapse, Keep, Exclude Task: You will work with the Data Analysis options of the EPM add-in ribbon. 1. Create a connection to the Sales Model for your assigned Environment and make sure your EPM Context bar and EPM Pane are displayed. Open native Excel. Go to the EPM ribbon and Log On. Create a connection with server URL: http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes). Let the system generate your connection name. a) From your remote desktop, choose the Start menu, and choose: Programs → Microsoft Office → Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Excel opens and displays a new worksheet. b) Choose the EPM tab → Log On. The EPM - Logon window is displayed. c) To the right of the Connection field, choose the Ellipse (...) button. The EPM - Connection Manager window opens. d) Choose the Create button. The Create Connection window appears. e) In the Server URL field, type: http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes) as shown below. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 107
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 82: Create Connection f) Choose Connect. g) Enter your user ID and password to create the connection. User ID BPC-## h) Password training Choose Logon. Environments and Models are loaded. i) Use the dropdown to select your Environment and Model. Environment Your assigned Environment j) Model Sales Choose Generate Connection Name. Continued on next page 108 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor The system will generate a connection name made up of the Model ID Environment ID. k) Click OK twice. l) If you are prompted, log on again with your user and password. m) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Options → User Options. The EPM - User Options window opens. n) o) 2. Choose the Others tab. In the bottom right, make sure the Display EPM Context Bar and Display EPM Pane checkboxes are selected. Choose OK. Ensure the Sales Connection is selected. a) 3. On the EPM Tab, under Active Connection, ensure the Sales - BPC430_## connection is selected. If not, choose it from the dropdown. Set your context: a) Set your EPM Context to the following: Dimension Member ID - Description CATEGORY Actual - Actual from GL ENTITY CONMID - Mid-Size Store Consolidated PRODUCT FISH - All Fish Products P_ACCT EXTSALES - External Sales RPTCURRENCY LC - Local Currency TIME 2009.TOTAL - 2009 MEASURES PERIODIC - Periodic Hint: You may have to scroll down within the EPM Context bar to see all of your dimensions. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 109
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 4. BPC430 Use the EPM Pane to create a new report. a) From the EPM Pane, right-click PRODUCT and select Move to Row Axis. b) From the EPM Pane, right-click TIME and select Move to Row Axis to move it under the PRODUCT dimension. c) From the EPM Pane, right-click ENTITY and select Move to Column Axis. The Report will execute with products in column A, and time in column B. 5. Display only the IDs in the result set. a) In the Row Axis Dimensions, choose Product by clicking the hyperlink. b) Click the member display icon c) Choose OK. and select ID from the drop down list. Products are now displayed with only their IDs. d) Do the same for Time and Entity. Figure 83: Initial Result - With IDs Displayed Continued on next page 110 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor 6. Set your defaults in the Sheet Options to expand to Children and the User Options to Expand/Collapse on Single Member and Keep/Exclude on Single Member. a) From the EPM Ribbon choose Options → Sheet Options. The EPM - Sheet Options window opens. b) On the General tab, set the Expand Options to Children. c) Choose OK. d) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Options → User Options The EPM - User Options window opens. e) f) 7. On the Navigation tab, make sure the Expand/Collapse on Single Member and Keep/Exclude on Single Member checkboxes are selected. Choose OK. Work with the Expand and Collapse features for 2009 Q1. a) Place your cursor on 2009.Q1 for FISHPOND. b) From the EPM Ribbon choose Expand. Q1 2009 is replaced with January, February, and March, but only for FISHPOND. c) 8. From the EPM Ribbon, choose Collapse. Work with the Keep feature for 2009 Q1. a) Place your cursor on 2009.Q1 for FISHPOND. b) From the EPM Ribbon choose Keep. For FISHPOND, you only see Q1 and no other data is visible. c) 9. From the EPM Ribbon choose Back. Work with the Exclude feature for 2009 Q1. a) Keep your cursor on 2009.Q1 for FISHPOND. b) From the EPM Ribbon choose Exclude. For FISHPOND, you no longer see Q1. For all other products you see all 4 quarters. c) From the EPM Ribbon choose Back. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 111
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 10. Change your User options so that when you Expand, Collapse, Keep, or Exclude, you do so for all like members for that dimension. a) From the EPM Ribbon choose Options → User Options. The EPM - User Options window opens on the Navigation tab. b) Deselect Expand/Collapse on Single Member. c) Deselect the Keep/Exclude on Single Member. d) Select the Enable Double Click checkbox. (It may already be selected.) e) Choose OK. 11. Use the Expand and Collapse features with the new User Options for 2009 Q1. a) Place your cursor on 2009.Q1 for FISHPOND and double click. Q1 2009 is replaced with January, February, and March for all products. b) Choose Back. 12. Use the Keep feature with the new User Options for 2009 Q2. a) Place your cursor on 2009.Q2 for FISHPOND. b) Choose Keep. You will see Q2 for all FISH products. Figure 84: Q2 For All Fish Products 13. Save your Report. a) b) Choose Company (Public) then Reports c) For the File Name, enter GR## Report Editor. d) 112 From the EPM Ribbon choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. Choose Save. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Exercise 3: Sorting, Filtering, and Ranking. Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the Sorting, Filtering, and Ranking options in your report. Business Example You would like to analyze the results of your report by sorting, filtering, and ranking. Task 1: Sort the results of your previously created report based on the 2011 total sales. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model, use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. Note: If you are ALREADY in Excel, go to Step #2. 2. Create a new blank workbook. 3. Choose the Sales - BPC430_## Connection 4. Set your context for the Sales model. 5. Create a new report with product in the rows, and time in the columns, using the EPM Pane. 6. From the EPM Pane, select Member and Children for the Bird and Dog parents. 7. From the EPM Pane, select Member and Children for Time. 8. Open the EPM - Report Editor to sort the results of your report. 9. You realize the dog products are mixed in with the bird products. You would like to sort the values, but keep the products within their groups. 10. Stay in the report for the next Task. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 113
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Task 2: Filter the results of your report based on the products that have greater than 200,000 in sales in 2011. 1. Open the EPM - Report Editor to filter the results of your report. 2. Remove the filter Task 3: Rank the results of your report to determine the top 3 selling products in 2011. 1. 2. 114 Open the EPM - Report Editor to rank the results of your report. Save your Report. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Solution 3: Sorting, Filtering, and Ranking. Task 1: Sort the results of your previously created report based on the 2011 total sales. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model, use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. Note: If you are ALREADY in Excel, go to Step #2. a) From your web client's Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel. Excel opens and the EPM - Connection Manager appears. b) Choose the Sales - BPC430_## connection. c) Click OK. d) If you are prompted, log on again with your user ID and password as shown below: User ID BPC-## 2. Password training Create a new blank workbook. a) b) 3. Create a blank workbook by choosing the Office button and then New. Choose OK or Create. Choose the Sales - BPC430_## Connection a) On the EPM Pane, under Active Connection, choose the Sales - BPC430_## connection. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 115
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 4. BPC430 Set your context for the Sales model. a) Set your EPM Context to the following: Dimension CATEGORY Actual - Actual from GL ENTITY CONMID - Mid-Size Store Consolidated PRODUCT FISH - All Fish Products P_ACCT EXTSALES - External Sales RPTCURRENCY LC - Local Currency TIME 2011.TOTAL - 2011 MEASURES 5. Member ID - Description PERIODIC - Periodic Create a new report with product in the rows, and time in the columns, using the EPM Pane. a) In the EPM Pane, right-click Product and select Move to Row Axis. b) Right-click Time and select Move to Column Axis. The Report is executed. 6. From the EPM Pane, select Member and Children for the Bird and Dog parents. a) In the Row Axis , choose Product. The EPM - Member Selector opens. b) Click the member display icon, and select ID. When you run the report with this setting, only the IDs will appear in the report. c) Select BIRD and DOG by selecting the checkbox to the left of each of them. d) Under Selection Relationship, select Member and Children. e) Choose the blue right arrow to move the selection to Selected Members. Choose the blue left arrow to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. f) Choose OK. Continued on next page 116 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor 7. From the EPM Pane, select Member and Children for Time. a) In the Column Axis, choose Time. The EPM - Member Selector opens. and select ID. b) Click the member display icon, c) Select 2011 by selecting the checkbox to the left of it. d) Under Selection Relationship, select Member and Children. e) Choose the right arrow to move the selection to Selected Members. Choose the blue left arrow to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. f) Choose OK. The report is executed with the new selections. 8. Open the EPM - Report Editor to sort the results of your report. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Edit Report. b) Choose the Sorting tab. c) Select Sort data Using the Following Criteria. d) Under Sorting Criteria, select the radio button for Last Column e) Leave the checkbox for Show Only Members Displayed in the Report selected as well as the radio button Ascending selections. Figure 85: Sorting Criteria f) Choose OK. Your report is now in ascending order according to the product sales for 2011. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 117
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 9. BPC430 You realize the dog products are mixed in with the bird products. You would like to sort the values, but keep the products within their groups. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Edit Report. The EPM - Report Editor window opens on the Layout tab by default. b) Choose the Sorting tab. c) In the bottom left-hand corner, select Sort Inside Level. d) Choose OK. Your report is now in ascending order, according to the product sales for 2011, but has kept the BIRD products and DOG products together. Figure 86: Sort Inside Level 10. Stay in the report for the next Task. a) Stay in the report for the next Task. Continued on next page 118 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Task 2: Filter the results of your report based on the products that have greater than 200,000 in sales in 2011. 1. Open the EPM - Report Editor to filter the results of your report. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Edit Report. b) Choose the Filtering tab. c) Select Filter data Using the Following Criteria. d) Under Filtering Criteria, choose the ellipsis (...) button at the end of the Based on: field. The Column Selector window opens. e) Highlight 2011.TOTAL (it may be displayed as 2011) and choose OK. f) Under the Based on: field, select the middle radio button, and from the dropdown, select > (Greater than) and enter 200000. g) Above Filter Expression, choose Add Criteria. h) Choose OK. Figure 87: Filtered Results (your values may vary) Your report is returned with only the products that exceeded 200,000 in sales in 2011. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 119
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 2. BPC430 Remove the filter a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Edit Report. b) Choose the Filtering tab. c) Deselect Filter Data Using the Following Criteria. d) Choose OK. Your report is no longer filtered. Continued on next page 120 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Task 3: Rank the results of your report to determine the top 3 selling products in 2011. 1. Open the EPM - Report Editor to rank the results of your report. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Edit Report. b) On the Layout tab, under the Row Axis Dimensions, choose the PRODUCT hyperlink. The EPM - Member Selector opens. c) Choose Bird and Dog by selecting the checkbox to the left of the dimension members. For the Selection Relationship, choose Base Level and move your selections to the right with the arrow. d) Remove the selections for Bird → Member and Children and Dog → Member and Children, by highlighting them and choosing the blue arrow pointing to the left. e) Choose OK. f) Choose the Ranking tab. g) Select Rank data Using the Following Criteria. h) Under the Ranking Criteria choose the ellipsis (...) button at the end of the Based on: field The Column Selector window opens. i) Highlight 2011.TOTAL (it may be displayed as 2011) and choose OK. j) Next to Display, select the radio button to Display the Top and enter 3 k) Choose OK. Figure 88: Ranking Results Your report is returned with only 3 products with the highest sales. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 121
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 2. Save your Report. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder b) Choose Company(Public), then choose Reports. c) For the File Name, enter GR## Top 3 Products. d) 122 BPC430 Choose Save. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Exercise 4: Excluding and Renaming Members Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the EPM - Report Editor to change member names and exclude members. Business Example The users of your reports request that you change the member names to something more meaningful. Additionally, for certain data analysis, you require the exclusion of certain members. Task 1: Open your previously created report to use the exclude members feature. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model, use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. Note: If you are ALREADY in Excel, go to Step #2. 2. Open the GR## Top 3 Products report. 3. Open the EPM - Report Editor and exclude DOGDRYPUPPY. Task 2: In this exercise, you will create a new report and change some dimension member names using the EPM - Report Editor. 1. 2. On the EPM - Pane, select the Sales - BPC430_## connection. 3. Set your context: 4. Use the EPM Report Editor to create a new report and change the Category and P_ACCT dimension member names to be more meaningful to your users. Change the Category member Actual from GL to Actual and the P_ACCT member from External Sales to Revenue. 5. 2011 Create a new blank workbook. Close the report without saving. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 123
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Solution 4: Excluding and Renaming Members Task 1: Open your previously created report to use the exclude members feature. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model, use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. Note: If you are ALREADY in Excel, go to Step #2. a) From your web client's Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel. Excel opens and the EPM - Connection Manager appears. b) Choose the Sales - BPC430_## connection. c) Click OK. d) If you are prompted, log on again with your user ID and password as shown below: User ID Password BPC-## training Continued on next page 124 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor 2. Open the GR## Top 3 Products report. a) From the EPM Ribbon choose Open → Open Server Root Folder. b) Choose the GR## Top 3 Products, then choose Open. Note: If you do not see this report, Choose the GR00 Top 3 Products Report under Company (Public) → Template Library. If you use the GR00 Top 3 Products report, choose Edit Report → Options and deselect Do Not Store Connection. Figure 89: Ranking Results Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 125
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 3. BPC430 Open the EPM - Report Editor and exclude DOGDRYPUPPY. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Edit Report. The EPM - Report Editor window opens on the Layout tab by default. b) Choose the Excluded Members tab. c) Select the Ellipsis (...) button to the right of Members to Exclude. The Multi Dimension Member Selector window opens. d) Under Dimensions, choose the PRODUCT dimension. e) Under Members, choose DOGDRYPUPPY. f) Choose OK. (Or hit enter) g) Choose Add. DOGDRYPUPPY is added to Excluded Members: on the left. h) Choose OK Figure 90: Ranking Results with DOGDRYPUPPY Excluded Since you excluded DOGDRYPUPPY, DOGROPE is now displayed because it had the next highest amount of sales. i) Close the workbook by choosing the Office button and then Close. j) Do not save the report. Continued on next page 126 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Task 2: In this exercise, you will create a new report and change some dimension member names using the EPM - Report Editor. 1. Create a new blank workbook. a) b) 2. Create a blank workbook by choosing the Office button and choose New. Choose Create. On the EPM - Pane, select the Sales - BPC430_## connection. a) 3. On the EPM -Pane, select the Sales - BPC430_## connection from the dropdown, if not already selected. Set your context: a) Set your EPM Context to the following: Dimension Member ID - Description CATEGORY Actual - Actual from GL ENTITY STORE1 - Store1 PRODUCT BIRD - All Bird Products P_ACCT EXTSALES - External Sales RPTCURRENCY LC - Local Currency TIME 2011.TOTAL - 2011 MEASURES PERIODIC - Periodic Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 127
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 4. BPC430 Use the EPM Report Editor to create a new report and change the Category and P_ACCT dimension member names to be more meaningful to your users. Change the Category member Actual from GL to Actual and the P_ACCT member from External Sales to Revenue. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose New Report. The EPM - Report Editor window opens on the Layout tab by default. b) Drag and drop the P_ACCT dimension to the Row Axis Dimensions. c) Drag and drop the Category dimension to the Column Axis Dimensions. d) Choose the Member Names tab. e) Under the Dimensions area, highlight CATEGORY and under the Members area highlight ACTUAL - Actual from GL. f) In the Enter a name for the member: field, enter Actual. g) Choose Override. Under Members, the value changes to Actual and is listed below with its original and customized name. h) Under the Dimensions area highlight P_ACCT and under the Members area highlight EXTSALES - External Sales i) In the Enter a name for the member: field type Revenue. j) Choose Override. Under Members, the value changes to Revenue. k) Choose OK. The Report is executed and your customized names are shown. 5. Close the report without saving. a) b) 128 Choose the Office button then choose Close. Do not save the report. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Report Editor Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use the EPM add-in Report Editor features, such as the Layout, Options, Sort, Rank, and Filter. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 129
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Lesson: Using The Member Selector Lesson Overview This lesson will deal with the Member Selector. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • Explain member relationships Describe expansions Efficiently control members displayed in result sets Business Example You want to determine how to control what dimension members appear in your report. Member Selector The Member Selector determines what members appear in the rows and columns of your report. Opening the EPM - Member Selector window. • • • • From the EPM Pane From the EPM Report Editor window From the EPM Context bar From the worksheet for dimensions in the page axis By default, the member taken into account for a dimension is the one defined in the EPM Context, with the Member and Children relationship. Once a dimension has been added to an axis section, you can select another member or relationship for the dimension by clicking the dimension name that appears as a link. The Member Selector window opens and you can select the member and relationship for which you want the report to display. There are various ways to open the Member Selector. 130 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using The Member Selector To modify the member selection for a dimension in the Page Axis: • • • • • From the EPM Pane click on the dimension From the EPM Report Editor click on the dimension From the EPM Context bar, from the dropdown choose Select other members From the worksheet, double-click the dimension member To modify the member selection for a dimension in the Row or Column Axis: • • • From the EPM Pane click on the dimension . From the EPM Report Editor click on the dimension. From the EPM Context bar, from the dropdown choose Select other members. Figure 91: EPM Member Selector - Dimension from Row or Column Axis Note: If you select the Dynamic option (selected by default), each time you perform a refresh on the report, the report will automatically pick up new members or remove members that have been deleted from the master data tables. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 131
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 The Member Selector is made up of the following: • • • • • • • • Hierarchy or List display: A dropdown list, which allows you to choose how you would like to view the members Member names: How you would like to see the members. This depends on your model/cube. For Planning and Consolidation: ID, Description, ID - Description Member filtering by properties: To help you select members, you can filter the members by property value. Member Search: To search for a specific member Member Sorting & Grouping button: Allows you to sort and group the selected members base on the property values. Dimension Members List: All the members/hierarchies of the current dimension. Selected Members: Where you select and order the members of the currently selected dimension to appear in your report Selected Relationship: A dropdown list that allows you to select many members at once, based on their relationship to the selected (checked) member. Note: The dynamic radio button option will automatically pick up new members or remove members each time you perform a refresh on the report. For example, for the Entity Dimension, if you choose the Hierarchy member US stores, and a new store is added to this hierarchy member, you will get this store automatically. If you select static, you will only receive the original stores. Dynamic is selected by default. • Hierarchy Levels: For some dynamic relationships, you can define the levels of the hierarchy you want to display in the Member Selector itself. Members can be placed or removed from the Selected Members list using the buttons representing arrows. The arrow to the right button will copy the checked members, and any related members depending on the Selection Relationship choice, to the bottom of the selected members list. The left arrow button will remove the selected members from the Selected Members list. Note: From the Selected Members list you can use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple members for removal. You can also delete members by selecting them and hitting the delete key. When selecting several members, the items will be displayed in the Selected Members list as the + operator (=OR) by default. You can select the & operator (=AND) so that only the members at the intersection of the different items are displayed in your report. 132 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using The Member Selector Figure 92: Member Relationships – Children and descendants Selection Relationship Example 1 If the selected member is: What shows up in the report: 2009.Total Member Only 2009.Total 2009.Total Member and Children 2009.Q1-Q4 and 2009.Total 2009.Total Children 2009.Q1-Q4 2009.Total Member and Descendants 2009.Total at the top, Then 2009 Q1, then Jan, Feb, Mar, then 2009.Q2, then April, May, etc 2009.Total Descendants 2009 Q1, then Jan, Feb, Mar, then 2009.Q2, then April, May, June, etc 2009.Total 2011 And the Relationship is: Member offset = 2 2011.Total © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 133
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 93: Member Relationships – Ascendants, Base level, Siblings Selection Relationship Example 2 If the selected member is: And the Relationship is: What shows up in the report: 2009.Q1 Member and Ascendants 2009.Q1 and 2009.Total 2009.Q1 Siblings 2009.Q1-Q4 2009.Q1 Same Level All quarters from all years 2009.Q1 Ascendants 2009.Total 2009.Total Member and Base Level 2009.Jan - 2009.Dec and 2009.Total 2009.Total Base Level 2009.Jan - 2009.Dec On relationships that include ascendants, descendants, and base level, you can define the levels of the hierarchy you want to display in the report. 134 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using The Member Selector Hierarchy Selection Relationship Example Example: Hierarchy Levels to Display If the member and relationship is: Hierarchy Levels selected: What shows up in the report: Year, Member, and Descendants All Levels Months, Quarters, Year Year, Member, and Descendants Number of Levels: 1 Quarters, Year Year, Member, and Descendants Only Level: 2 Months, Year Hierarchy Levels to Display • • • By default, All Levels is selected, which shows all levels of the hierarchy. The Number of Levels option allows you to select the number of levels you want to display. . The Only Level option allows you to select the only level you want to display. Member Sorting and Grouping by Properties You can sort the selected members based on property values. Member Filtering by Properties You can filter the members by property. Figure 94: EPM Member Selector - Page Axis Dimension 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 135
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 The EPM Member Selector , which opens from a dimension that is a part of the Page Axis, is a sub-part of the one opened for the dimensions from the Row and Column axes. However, it does include an additional option, Allow Multi-Selection. When you select several members, the data on the members are automatically aggregated in the report. Note: • • 136 You cannot select more than 30 members. If you often use a selection of members for a page axis dimension, you should convert the selection into a custom member. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using The Member Selector Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain member relationships • Describe expansions • Efficiently control members displayed in result sets 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 137
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Lesson: Working With Member Recognition Lesson Overview This lesson will explain how to use the Local Member Recognition and Member Recognition functions. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • Create a report using Member Recognition Create a report using Local Member Recognition Business Example In addition to creating a report with the EPM Report Editor and the EPM Pane, you would like to use the additional functionality available using automatic Member Recognition. You would also like to add a local member to your created report so you can retrieve the Account Type property for each Account displayed in your report. Member Recognition On the EPM - Sheet Options window, you can turn on Member Recognition by choosing the checkboxes for Activate Member Recognition and Activate Local Member Recognition. 138 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Working With Member Recognition Figure 95: Member and Local Member Recognition Member Recognition allows you to type the Dimension Member values in your worksheet. If the system recognizes your typing, you will see a green flash in the background for a fraction of a second, then the Dimension Member will appear. If the system does not recognize your typing, the EPM - Ambiguous Name window will appear with a list of members matching your criteria. Local Member Recognition allows you to create local members for your report. For example, you can enter a blank column and use the EPMMemberProperty function to bring back the Account Type of the Account dimension, so that you can whether it is an expense or income account. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 139
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 140 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 BPC430 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Working With Member Recognition Exercise 5: Member Recognition Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Select members based on a property. • Use Local Member Recognition. • Create a report using Member Recognition. Business Example You have created reports with the EPM add-in and the EPM Pane. Now you want to use the Member Recognition functionality. Task 1: In this exercise, you will select members based on a property and use Local Member Recognition. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model, use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. Note: If you are ALREADY in Excel, go to Step #2. 2. Create a new blank workbook. 3. Choose the Sales - BPC430_## Connection. 4. Set your EPM Context. 5. Create a report with the P_ACCT dimension in the Row Axis and Time in the Column Axis. 6. For the P_ACCT dimension, use the properties filter to select only EXP and INC accounts. 7. Turn on Local Member Recognition. 8. Insert an empty column and place your EPM Member Property formula there. 9. Close the report without saving Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 141
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Task 2: Use Member Recognition to create a report 1. 2. Choose the Sales - BPC430_## Connection 3. Turn on Member Recognition 4. Create a report for Dogball and 2011. 5. 142 Create a blank worksheet Close the report without saving © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Working With Member Recognition Solution 5: Member Recognition Task 1: In this exercise, you will select members based on a property and use Local Member Recognition. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model, use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. Note: If you are ALREADY in Excel, go to Step #2. a) From your web client's Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel. Excel opens and the EPM - Connection Manager appears. b) Choose the Sales - BPC430_## connection. c) Click OK. d) If you are prompted, logon again with your user Id and password as shown below: User ID BPC-## 2. Password training Create a new blank workbook. a) b) 3. Create a blank workbook by choosing the Office button and choose New. Choose OK or Create. Choose the Sales - BPC430_## Connection. a) On the EPM Pane, under Active Connection choose the Sales - BPC430_## connection. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 143
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 4. BPC430 Set your EPM Context. a) Set your EPM Context to the following: Dimension CATEGORY Actual - Actual from GL ENTITY STORE1 - Store1 PRODUCT FISH - All Fish Products P_ACCT EXTSALES - External Sales RPTCURRENCY LC - Local Currency TIME 2011.TOTAL - 2011 MEASURES 5. Member ID - Description PERIODIC - Periodic Create a report with the P_ACCT dimension in the Row Axis and Time in the Column Axis. a) From the EPM Ribbon choose New Report. The EPM - Report Editor window opens on the Layout tab by default. b) c) 6. Drag and drop the P_ACCT dimension to the Row Axis Dimensions. Drag and drop the Time dimension to the Column Axis Dimensions. For the P_ACCT dimension, use the properties filter to select only EXP and INC accounts. a) Open the EPM - Member Selector by clicking on the P_ACCT dimension. The EPM - Member Selector window opens. b) Deselect the current selection under Selected Members on the right by highlighting Context (External Sales), with the Relationship Member and Children and move it to the left with the blue arrow pointing left. c) Choose the yellow icon. The Member Filtering by Properties area appears. d) In the first row, under Property choose Account Type. e) Under Operator choose = . Continued on next page 144 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Working With Member Recognition f) Under Values choose EXP. g) In the second row, under Property choose Account Type. h) Under Operator choose = . i) Under Values choose INC. Figure 96: EPM - Member Selector j) Choose the Add Dynamic Filter button which will move this filter to the right under Selected Members k) Choose OK to close the EPM Member Selector window. l) Choose OK to close the EPM Report Editor window. The Report is executed with all the EXP and INC accounts. 7. Turn on Local Member Recognition. a) From the EPM Ribbon choose Options → Sheet Options The EPM - Sheet Options window opens b) On the General tab, select the checkbox Activate Local Member Recognition (If not already selected). c) Choose OK. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 145
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 8. BPC430 Insert an empty column and place your EPM Member Property formula there. a) Highlight column B and then right-click and choose Insert. b) In cell B2 type =EPMMEMBERPROPERTY(“”,EPMMEMBERID(A2),“Account Type”) (no dashes) and then hit enter. Note: EPMMemberProperty is equivalent to EVPRO which was used in the prior releases. The first parameter “” references the current connection name. You could have defined it if necessary such as “SALES”. EPMMemberID does a look up for the ID of the member, and that is critical since this function requires the ID to display property values. You will see the formula was copied down for you and you will see either “EXP” or “INC” as the account types. Also, in cell B1, the EPMLocalMember function has been generated. 9. Close the report without saving a) Choose the Office button and choose Close The Microsoft Office window opens. b) Choose No Task 2: Use Member Recognition to create a report 1. Create a blank worksheet a) 2. From the Office button choose New → Blank Workbook → Create Choose the Sales - BPC430_## Connection a) On the EPM Pane under Active Connection choose the Sales - BPC430_## connection. Continued on next page 146 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Working With Member Recognition 3. Turn on Member Recognition a) From the EPM Ribbon choose Options → Sheet Options. The EPM - Sheet Options window opens. b) c) 4. On the General tab, select the checkbox Activate Member Recognition. (If not already selected) Choose OK. Create a report for Dogball and 2011. a) Place your cursor in cell B4 and type DOGBALL. You will see a flicker of green light, then the system will validate your entry. b) Place your cursor in cell C3 and type 2011. You will see a flicker of green light, then the system will validate your entry, and retrieve the transaction data. c) Place your cursor in cell B5 and type food. Since there are multiple products with “food”, the EPM - Ambiguous Name window appears where you can select from a list of products that have the string food in their ID or description. d) Double-click Pet Type Consolidation, All Bird Products, Gourmet Bird Food Gourmet Bird Food is added to your report. 5. Close the report without saving a) Choose the Office button and then Close The Microsoft Office window opens. b) 2011 Choose No © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 147
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create a report using Member Recognition • Create a report using Local Member Recognition Related Information 148 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Linking Reports Lesson: Linking Reports Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn how to use Quick Links. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • Use data links Use member links Use report links Business Example Your business users need to link to related data while performing analysis in the Excel Interface of the EPM Interface and so you need to know how to set up Quick Links. Quick Link Options You can create quick links in a report to another report contained in another Workbook. Quick links can be used to guide you through ad-hoc analysis. The three Microsoft Office options are shown below. • • • 2011 Microsoft Word document Microsoft Excel workbook Microsoft PowerPoint presentation © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 149
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 You can define three types of quick links, depending on your analysis needs: 1. 2. 3. Quick link defined on specific data. The linked workbook inherits the definition of the selected data cell based on: • The cell intersection • The context • The page axis Quick link defined on a specific member. The linked workbook inherits the definition of the member cell based on: • Selected member or members • Members in the page axis • Members in the context Quick link defined on the current report. The linked workbook inherits the definition of the report: based on: • • Members in the page axis Members in the context As a link is always attached to a combination of members and not a specific cell or cell range, if you move the members in the report, the links follow. If you have defined a link to another workbook, the linked workbook opens in a new instance of Excel (the latest modification that you have made in the user context in the first workbook are taken into account). Precedence rules: a quick link defined on a data takes precedence over a link defined on a member, which takes precedence over a link defined on the whole report. The workbooks to be opened using the quick links can be located on: • • The Planning and Consolidation server Windows directory Symbols with default color-coding differentiate quick links defined on specific data intersections and quick links defined on a specific members. You can change the colors in the User options dialog box as shown below: 150 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Linking Reports Figure 97: Quick Link - User Options You can hide the quick link symbols by clicking the Show Link Symbols button. Note: When the symbols are hidden, the quick links are not active and therefore cannot be clicked on. After clicking the Show Link Symbols button, you must perform a refresh. You can open a linked workbook by clicking a quick link symbol or by clicking the link that appears in the EPM pane. The link that appears in the EPM pane depends on the selected cell in the report since the precedence rules apply. Creating Quick Links Depending on your analysis needs, select a data cell, a member cell, or any other cell in your report and click Quick Links in the ribbon, then select one of the following commands: • • • Add Cell Link. Add Member Link. Add Report Link. Hint: You can also right-click a cell and select the appropriate command from the EPM menu. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 151
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 If the Quick Links → Show Link Symbols command is activated, the following symbols are displayed: • • For a data link, a green symbol by default will appear in the selected cell. For a member link, a blue symbol by default will appear in the selected cell. Below you can see a report with the link symbols. Figure 98: Report With Links 152 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Linking Reports Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use data links • Use member links • Use report links 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 153
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Lesson: Formatting Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn about formatting options in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • Work with the formatting style sheet to create more attractive reports. Business Example You want to format your Reports and Input Forms. There are various options for formatting. You can do simple formatting, lock the cells that are not input ready, use the format by property using multiple criteria, or use a new cell-based formula delivered with the EPM add-in to override the data range formatting. The Dynamic Formatting Template Figure 99: Dynamic Formatting Template 154 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting In this section, you will learn about the Dynamic Formatting Template in the EPM add-in. Dynamic formatting is defined in a dedicated sheet. Formats can be applied to levels of a hierarchy, types of members, odd/even rows, or columns and page axis dimensions. Since the EPMFormattingSheet is an excel sheet, it can be copied and changed to be applied to other reports, worksheets. Common Actions to Several Formatting Sections There are various sections on the EPM Formatting Sheet • • • • Hierarchy Level Formatting Dimension Member/Property Formatting Row and Column Banding Page Axis Formatting There are certain settings that are common to all sections: • • • • Checkboxes Priority to Column or Row Format Data and Use Columns/Cells Header and Use Columns/Cells Actions relevant to several formatting sections Checkboxes: Enable you to specify the formatting sections, or formatting items inside a section, that you want to apply to the reports. Priority to Column or row format: Enable you to specify which one of the defined formats for row or columns will be applied first in case of conflicts. For example, if you select Priority to Column Format the Column section will appear below the Row Section, and the precedence rules apply. Formatting: Allows you to use the standard Microsoft Office Excel cell formatting features in the Data and Header Columns to define the formatting. Also gives you the ability to directly enter the format settings in the Use cell. By double clicking the Use cell, you will open the EPM Formatting Sheet - Cell Format window which will allow you to override certain format settings. Cell Protection: However, you can unlock cells or lock cells as necessary. Right-click on one or more cells, and from the context menu select EPM → Unlock Selected Cells. When you are finished, if you'd like, you can re-lock by choosing EPM → Lock Selected Cells. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 155
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 100: Formatting Section Precedence Rules Figure 101: Precedence Rules 156 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting If you check more than one formatting section, the format settings in lower sections override the ones in upper sections in the case of conflict. However, in the Hierarchy Level Formatting section, the precedence rule is as follows: Base Level Format, then Formatting on Specific Level, then Default Format. Hierarchy Level Formatting You can format the levels of hierarchies. The formats that can be applied in the hierarchy section are Default, Base Level and Formatting on Specific Level. • • • • Base Level, Specific Level, and Default formats Structure Levels versus Relative Levels Levels can be added or deleted For Nested Dimensions, can choose Inner or Outer Dimension Base Level Format: Specific format for base level members (not calculated) Formatting on Specific Level: When applying formatting to a specific level, you have your choice or Structure Levels or Relative Levels. Structure levels refer to the levels of the hierarchy as defined in the source. Relative levels refer to the levels displayed in the report. For Instance, Quarter is the 2nd level of the hierarchy as defined in the source connection, but it is the first level being displayed in the report. If you select the Relative Levels option, a checkbox appears Start formatting from the lower level displayed. This checkbox enables you to invert the level order, the lowest level is displayed in first position. If a row or column axis contains more than one dimension, you can specify which dimension you want the defined format to be applied to. The Inner dimension is the last dimension, and the outer dimension is the first dimension in the axis. Default Format: Default format for hierarchy level. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 157
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 How to Format for Hierarchies 1. From the EPM Ribbon, choose View Formats. The EPMFormattingSheet will open in your Workbook. 2. For the Hierarchy Level Formatting section, choose the checkbox to apply the formatting section. 3. Choose either the radio button for Priority to Column Format or Priority to Row Format. Note: The lowest set of formats in the section takes precedence. 4. For the formats you want to apply, choose the checkbox to the left of Apply. Note: The precedence is Base Level, Formatting on Specific Level, then Default. 5. If you are using Formatting on Specific Level, choose either the Structure Levels radio button or the Relative Levels. If you choose Relative Levels, you can also decide if you want the formatting to start from the lowest level displayed by selecting the checkbox Start formatting from the lowest level displayed. 6. Additionally, if you are using Formatting on Specific Level, you can choose either the Add Level button or the Remove Last Level button as necessary. 7. For the formats you are applying, place your cursor on either the 10000 field, if you are attempting to change the Data formats, and/or the Label field if you are attempting to format Headers. The format palette will open as well as the Excel Context Menu. Set your formats either from the palette or by choosing Format Cells to select your formats there. 8. 9. 158 If you have more then one dimension in an axis, you can choose where the formats are applied by selecting the radio button Inner Dimension or Outer Dimension to the left of the Apply Format To: area. Return to the sheet where your report is and be sure the Apply Dynamic Formatting checkbox is selected. This can be found on either the EPM Ribbon → Options → Sheet Options Formatting tab (applies to the worksheet) or from EPM - Report Editor (EPM Ribbon → Edit Report ) Options tab. (applies to the report) © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting Dimension Member and Property Formatting Formatting can be applied to: • • • • • • • Custom members Calculated Members Local Members Inputable members (BPC only) Changed members (BPC only) Specific members Property of a member Figure 102: Dynamic Cell Locking 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 159
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 103: Member Property Formatting Row and Column Banding Section and Page Axis Formatting Section Other Formatting Sections • Row and Column Banding: Allows you to choose one or two alternating formats Applies to Data or Headers • Rows or Columns Page Axis Formatting: Formatting for all dimensions of the Page Axis 160 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting Applying Formatting to Specific Reports or Worksheets Dynamic Formats can be applied to the current worksheet or a specific report. • • The current worksheet A specific Report Note: If you modify a dynamic format, which has already been applied to a worksheet, you will need to refresh the report to see the dynamic formatting template by report. • • • You can have multiple formatting sheets in your Workbook Each Report/Input Schedule sheet can point to a different Formatting Sheet Do so from the EPM Ribbon Options → Sheet Options → Formatting tab Figure 104: EPMCopyRange Function In addition to the Formatting sheet, you can also apply formats via the EPMCopyRange function. These formats will override the EPMFormattingSheet formats, but only for the data ranges, not on labels 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 161
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 105: Hierarchy Formatting Figure 106: Hierarchy and Dynamic Formatting 162 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting Applying a Default Dynamic Formatting Template to a Worksheet 1. From the EPM Ribbon choose Options → Sheet Options. 2. Select the Formatting tab. 3. Select the Apply Dynamic Formatting checkbox. 4. Select the template you want to apply to the worksheet from the Default Formatting Sheet list. 5. If the reports that the users want to apply dynamic formatting to already contain formatting applied by an add-in other than the EPM add-in, take one of the following actions: • • 6. 2011 To clear the existing formatting and override it with the dynamic formatting, select the Clear report format before applying dynamic formatting option. To keep the existing formatting and override it with the dynamic formatting, deselect the Clear report format before applying dynamic formatting option. Choose OK © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 163
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Applying a Default Dynamic Formatting Template to a Report 1. Select a cell in the report to which you want to apply a dynamic formatting template. 2. From the EPM Ribbon choose Edit Report The EPM - Report Editor opens 3. Select the Options tab 4. If the Default Dynamic Formatting template has been selected for the worksheet in the Sheet Options, then the Apply Dynamic Formatting checkbox is already set. If not, choose it. 5. Select the template you want to apply to the report from the Default Formatting Sheet list. 6. If the reports the users want to apply dynamic formatting to already contain formatting applied by an add-in other than the EPM add-in, take one of the following actions: • • 7. 164 To clear the existing formatting and override it with the dynamic formatting, select the Clear report format before applying dynamic formatting option. To keep the existing formatting and override it with the dynamic formatting, deselect the Clear report format before applying dynamic formatting option. Choose OK © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting Exercise 6: Apply Dynamic Formatting Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • You want to format your reports to be more user friendly. Business Example Users are requesting that you apply formats for different levels of a hierarchy. Additionally, for the Input forms, they would like to know which cells can be planned and which cells have been change. Task 1: Create a report and apply dynamic formatting. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. Note: If you are already in Excel, go to Step #2. 2. Create a new blank workbook. 3. On the EPM - Pane select the Sales - BPC430_## connection. 4. Set your EPM Context as you see below: Dimension Member ID - Description CATEGORY Budget - Current Budget ENTITY STORE1 - Store1 PRODUCT CON_PET_TYPE - Pet Type Consolidation P_ACCT CE0004010 - Personnel Expenses RPTCURRENCY LC - Local Currency TIME 2012.TOTAL - 2012 MEASURES PERIODIC - Periodic Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 165
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 5. Use the EPM Pane, to create a report with Time on the row axis and Product on the Column Axis. 6. Switch your report to an input form. 7. Change the members for the Time Dimension to Months, Quarters, and Year. 8. Change the members for the PRODUCT Dimension to only display IDs. 9. Apply Formatting to the Hierarchy Levels as shown in the screenshots below: Figure 107: Hierarchy Level Formatting Figure 108: Row Formatting 10. Turn on the Apply Dynamic Formatting option. 11. View the formatting results. Task 2: Now, we want to add some formatting to let our planners know which cells can be planned, and which cells have been changed. 1. Go to the EPMFormattingSheet. Continued on next page 166 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting 2. Apply formatting for the Dimension Member/Property Formatting section as shown in the screenshot. Figure 109: Dimension Member Property Formatting 3. 4. 2011 View the formatting results. Save your report to the Server Root Folder. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 167
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Solution 6: Apply Dynamic Formatting Task 1: Create a report and apply dynamic formatting. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. Note: If you are already in Excel, go to Step #2. a) From your web client's Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel. Excel opens and the EPM - Connection Manager appears. b) Choose the Sales - BPC430_## connection. c) Click OK. d) If you are prompted, log on again with your user ID and password as shown below: User ID BPC-## 2. Password training Create a new blank workbook. a) b) 3. Create a blank workbook by choosing the Office button and choose New. Choose Create. On the EPM - Pane select the Sales - BPC430_## connection. a) 4. On the EPM -Pane, select the Sales - BPC430_## connection from the dropdown, if not already selected. Set your EPM Context as you see below: Dimension Member ID - Description CATEGORY Budget - Current Budget ENTITY STORE1 - Store1 PRODUCT CON_PET_TYPE - Pet Type Consolidation Continued on next page 168 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting P_ACCT CE0004010 - Personnel Expenses RPTCURRENCY LC - Local Currency TIME 2012.TOTAL - 2012 MEASURES PERIODIC - Periodic a) 5. Set your EPM Context as you see above: Use the EPM Pane, to create a report with Time on the row axis and Product on the Column Axis. a) From the EPM Pane, right-click TIME and select Move to Row Axis. b) From the EPM Pane, right click on PRODUCT and select Move to Column Axis. A report is created. 6. Switch your report to an input form. a) From the EPM Ribbon, go to Options → Sheet Options. The EPM - Sheet Options window opens. b) c) 7. On the General tab, under Data Input, select the checkbox next to Use as Input Form. Choose OK. Change the members for the Time Dimension to Months, Quarters, and Year. a) On the EPM Pane, in the Row Axis , click TIME. The EPM - Member Selector window opens. b) Move the Selected Members Context 2012.TOTAL - 2012 with the Relationship Member and Children to the left. c) Select 2012.TOTAL - 2012 by placing a checkbox to the left and, on the bottom left, select the Selection Relationship to Member and Descendants. Move this selection to the right under Selected arrow. Members by using the d) Choose the Member Display Selector and choose ID . Choose OK. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 169
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 8. BPC430 Change the members for the PRODUCT Dimension to only display IDs. a) Call the EPM - Member Selector by clicking on the PRODUCT dimension in the EPM Pane Column Axis.. The EPM - Member Selector window opens. b) Choose the Member Display Selector c) Choose OK. and choose ID. The report is updated with these selections. 9. Apply Formatting to the Hierarchy Levels as shown in the screenshots below: Figure 110: Hierarchy Level Formatting Continued on next page 170 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting Figure 111: Row Formatting a) From the EPM Ribbon choose View Formats. The EPMFormattingSheet opens. Hint: If the sheet does not open, select it from the available sheets in your workbook. It will be the first sheet. b) In the Hierarchy Level Formatting section, note that Hierarchy Level Formatting is already selected in cell H5. c) At the top of the section, choose the radio buttons for Priority to Row Format and Structure Levels in D6. d) In the Row Section, select Apply to the left of Formatting on Specific Level around cell C37 and C38. e) Also, in the Row Section, click in the cell under the Data column for Level 1 in F39. You have selected the cell to apply formats to the rows containing the total for the year which is the 1st level of the hierarchy. f) Right-click on cell F39. The palette opens to change the format. g) Choose a fill color of your choice and set that to Bold. h) Also, in the Row Section, click in the cell under the Data column for Level 2 in F42. You have selected the cell to apply formats to the rows for the 2nd level of the hierarchy. i) Right-click on that cell. The palette opens to change the format. j) Choose a fill color of your choice. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 171
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 10. Turn on the Apply Dynamic Formatting option. a) Click on Sheet 1. b) From the EPM ribbon, choose Options → Sheet Options. c) Choose the Formatting tab. d) Select Apply Dynamic Formatting and confirm that the EPMFormattingSheet is the Default Formatting Sheet. Then choose OK. Note: If you cannot select Apply Dynamic Formatting, choose OK and choose → View Formats to display the formatting template. Choose View Formats again to close it. Choose Options → Sheet Options → Formatting and select Apply Dynamic Formatting and confirm that the EPMFormattingSheet is the Default Formatting Sheet and choose OK. Continued on next page 172 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting 11. View the formatting results. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Refresh. You should see your formats! Figure 112: Hierarchy Level Format Results Note: You may have noticed we did not deselect the Apply checkbox to the left of Default formats, but that is OK, since our Formatting on the Levels carries precedence over the default formats. Task 2: Now, we want to add some formatting to let our planners know which cells can be planned, and which cells have been changed. 1. Go to the EPMFormattingSheet. a) Choose the EPMFormattingSheet. Note: If you cannot see the EPMFormattingSheet choose View Formats from the EPM Ribbon. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 173
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 2. BPC430 Apply formatting for the Dimension Member/Property Formatting section as shown in the screenshot. Continued on next page 174 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting Figure 113: Dimension Member Property Formatting a) Scroll down to the Dimension Member/Property Formatting section, and select the checkbox at the top of the section in J52. This activates Dimension Member/Property Formatting. b) At the top of the section, choose the radio button for Priority to Row Format in D53. c) In the Row Section, select the Apply checkbox to the left of Inputable Member Default Format in C84. d) Select Changed Member Default Format in C90. e) Place your cursor on the cell F84. You can now apply formats to the rows containing cells that are available for input. f) Right-click on that cell. The palette opens to change the format. g) Choose a fill color of your choice and change the number to have commas, and no decimals. h) Also in the Row Section, place your cursor in F90. You can now apply formats to the cells that have been changed. i) Right-click on that cell. The palette opens to change the format. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 175
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 3. BPC430 View the formatting results. a) Go to Sheet1 and choose Refresh. b) Double-click BIRD to expand to the base level members. You should see your formats for the inputable cells, and also the hierarchy cells. c) Type 125 into B2. You should see the new format. Figure 114: Inputable and Changed Formats Note: Again, the precedence rules apply. Originally, the cell had the inputable format. Then, once the cell was changed, it took on the changed format, since that format was lower in the formatting sheet. 4. Save your report to the Server Root Folder. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. The Save window will appear. b) 176 Stay in the TEMPLATELIBRARY folder and name your report GR## Formatting. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Formatting Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Work with the formatting style sheet to create more attractive reports. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 177
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting Lesson Overview In the EPM add-in, you can create multi-reporting spreadsheets, based on several data sources. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • Create a workbook with two different reports from two different connections. Create two reports that share a row axis. Business Example You need to know how to combine data from multiples sources into one workbook. Multi-Source Reporting In the EPM add-in, you can create multi-reporting spreadsheets, based on several connections (data sources). For instance, in a single worksheet, you can display different reports. The first report can be connected to a Planning and Consolidation data source and a second report can be connected to a BW InfoCube using a Local ODBO Provider Connection. 178 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting Figure 115: Multi-Source Reporting Reporting Using Axis Sharing Your worksheet can also contain 2 reports that share an axis. For instance, you can create one report that contains the Account dimension in the Row Axis, and the Time dimension in the Column Axis. The second report can share the Row Axis or Column Axis by using the Row or Column Axis Share with: dropdown where you will point to the report that you want to share the axis with. This is referred to as a “Butterfly” report. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 179
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 116: Axis Sharing Worksheet Generation In addition to Multi-Source Reporting, and Axis Sharing, you can also have the system generate multiple sheets for you using a Dimension. Figure 117: Worksheet Generation 180 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting Figure 118: Worksheet Generation Output 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 181
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 182 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 BPC430 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting Exercise 7: Multi-Source Reporting Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a multi-source workbook, an axis sharing workbook, and a multiple sheet workbook. Business Example You would like to see how to create multiple reports within your Excel Workbook. Task 1: In this exercise, you will use the Multi-Source reporting feature available for your input form within the EPM add-in. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model, use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. Note: If you are ALREADY in Excel, go to Step #2. 2. If you do not have a blank workbook, create one. If you have one, move to Step 3. 3. On the EPM - Pane, make sure the Sales - BPC430_## connection is selected. 4. Set your EPM Context. 5. Create a report with the Product dimension in the Row Axis and Time in the Column Axis. For the Product dimension, set the members to All Dog Products, member and children. For the Time dimension, set the member to 2011, children. 6. Save this report in the Server root folder. Name it GR## Multi. 7. Create another connection to the Expense Model for your assigned Environment. 8. Create another report on the Expense Connection. 9. Close the report without saving. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 183
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Task 2: You now want to create two reports that share the same row axis. 1. Open the previously created report GR## Multi 2. Create 5 blank rows at the top of your spreadsheet: 3. Insert another report using your SALES - BPC430_## connection. 4. Shift the axis to make the report more readable. 5. Close the report without saving. Task 3: You would like to create multiple reports using the Generate Worksheets option. 1. 2. 184 Open the previously created report, GR## Multi. Generate multiple worksheets based on Entity. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting Solution 7: Multi-Source Reporting Task 1: In this exercise, you will use the Multi-Source reporting feature available for your input form within the EPM add-in. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model, use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. Note: If you are ALREADY in Excel, go to Step #2. a) From your web client's Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel. Excel opens and the EPM - Connection Manager appears. b) c) 2. Choose the Sales - BPC430_## connection. Click OK. If you do not have a blank workbook, create one. If you have one, move to Step 3. a) b) 3. Create a blank workbook by choosing the Office button and choose New. Choose Create. On the EPM - Pane, make sure the Sales - BPC430_## connection is selected. a) 4. On the EPM -Pane, select the Sales - BPC430_## connection from the dropdown, if not already selected. Set your EPM Context. a) Set your EPM Context to the following: Dimension Member ID - Description CATEGORY Actual - Actual from GL ENTITY STORE1 - Store1 PRODUCT DOG - All Dog Products P_ACCT CE0001000 - Total Costs RPTCURRENCY LC - Local Currency Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 185
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 TIME MEASURES 5. 2011.TOTAL - 2011 PERIODIC - Periodic Create a report with the Product dimension in the Row Axis and Time in the Column Axis. For the Product dimension, set the members to All Dog Products, member and children. For the Time dimension, set the member to 2011, children. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose New Report. The EPM - Report Editor window opens. b) Drag and drop the PRODUCT dimension to the Row Axis Dimensions. c) Drag and drop the TIME dimension to the Column Axis Dimensions. d) Verify that B2 is the first cell to return the data range. e) Open the EPM - Member Selector by clicking on the Time in the Column Axis. The EPM - Member Selector window opens. f) Move the Selected Members Context 2011.TOTAL - 2011, with the Relationship Member and Children to the left. g) Choose 2011.TOTAL - 2011 by placing a checkbox to the left of the member. On the bottom left, set your Selection Relationship to Children. Move this selection to the right under Selected Members by using the arrow. h) Select ID as the display for TIME. i) Choose OK to close the EPM - Member Selector. j) In the row axis, click PRODUCT. The EPM - Member Selector window opens. k) Select ID as the display for PRODUCT. l) Choose OK to close the EPM - Member Selector. m) Choose OK again to close the EPM - Report Editor. Continued on next page 186 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting The Report is executed. 6. Save this report in the Server root folder. Name it GR## Multi. a) From the EPM Ribbon choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder The Save window opens. b) c) Under the Template Library choose Reports d) Type the File Name GR## Multi. e) Choose Save. f) 7. On the left choose the Company (Public) folder. Remain in this report for the next step. Create another connection to the Expense Model for your assigned Environment. a) From the EPM Pane, under Active Connection, select the dropdown and choose Select Another Connection. Note: If you already have the EXPENSE - BPC430_## connection, select it as the Active Connection in the EPM Pane and move on to Step #8 below. The EPM - Connection Manager window is displayed. b) Choose the Create button. The Create Connection window appears. c) In the Server URL field, type: http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes) as shown below. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 187
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 119: Create connection d) Choose Connect. e) If prompted, enter your user ID and password to create the connection then choose Logon. If not, continue to the next step. User ID BPC-## f) Password training Use the dropdown to select your Environment and Model. Environment Your assigned Environment g) Model Expense Choose Generate Connection Name Continued on next page 188 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting The system will generate a connection name made up of the Model ID Environment ID. h) i) Choose the connection you just created: Expense - BPC430_## j) 8. Choose OK . Choose OK. Create another report on the Expense Connection. a) Place your cursor in cell A15. b) From the EPM Ribbon, choose New Report. c) Drag and drop the P_ACCOUNT dimension to the Row Axis Dimensions. d) Open the EPM - Member Selector by clicking on the hyperlink for P_ACCOUNT and set the display for P_ACCOUNT to Description and then choose OK to close the EPM - Member Selector. e) Drag and drop the P_TIME dimension to the Column Axis Dimensions. f) Open the EPM - Member Selector by clicking on the hyperlink for P_TIME and set the display for P_TIME to Description and then choose OK. To close the EPM - Member Selector. . g) Verify that B15 is the first cell to return the data range. h) Choose OK. The second report will execute i) Set your Context to the following: Dimension P_ACCOUNT PL400 - Indirect Expenses P_CATEGORY Plan - Plan P_COST Total - Total P_CURR LC - Local Currency P_TIME 2011.TOTAL - 2011 MEASURES j) Member ID - Description PERIODIC - Periodic From the EPM Ribbon, choose Refresh → Refresh Worksheet. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 189
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Both reports will refresh. You now have data from two different models from your environment. However, you could have selected from another Environment, or even a BW InfoCube. See the Procedure within this book to connect to a BW InfoCube. 9. Close the report without saving. a) From the Office Button, choose Close. The Microsoft Office Excel window will open. b) Choose No. (We do not want to save). Task 2: You now want to create two reports that share the same row axis. 1. Open the previously created report GR## Multi a) b) 2. From the EPM Ribbon, choose Open → Open Server Root Folder → Reports Choose GR## Multi and choose Open. Create 5 blank rows at the top of your spreadsheet: a) Create 5 blank rows at the top by selecting rows 1 through 5, then right-click and choose Insert. Your data in your report should now begin in cell B7. Continued on next page 190 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting 3. Insert another report using your SALES - BPC430_## connection. a) Check that your Sales Connection is selected in the EPM Pane under Active Connection. If not, select it from the dropdown. b) Place your cursor in cell I1. c) From the EPM Ribbon, choose New Report. d) Drag and drop the Entity dimension to the Column Axis Dimensions. e) Open the EPM - Member Selector by clicking on the hyperlink for Entity and set the display for Entity to ID then choose OK to close the EPM Member Selector f) Under Row Axis Shared with: use the dropdown to select Default Report The PRODUCT dimension is inherited from the default report. g) Choose OK. Figure 120: Shared Axis You now have two reports sharing the same Row Axis. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 191
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 4. BPC430 Shift the axis to make the report more readable. a) From the EPM Pane, under Current Report, choose Default Report from the dropdown. (This is the 1st report) b) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Edit Report. The EPM - Report Editor should open. Make sure you are in Default Report. (This will be in the upper left.) If not, close the EPM - Report Editor and select it from the dropdown again. c) For the Row Axis Dimensions, choose a shift of -1 by clicking the down arrow once. The Column Axis shifts to the left and the Row Axis shifts to the right. d) Choose OK to close the EPM - Report Editor. Figure 121: Shared Axis with a Shift The Row Axis is now between the two reports. 5. Close the report without saving. a) From the Office Button, choose Close. The Microsoft Office Excel window will open. b) Choose No. (We do not want to save.) Continued on next page 192 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting Task 3: You would like to create multiple reports using the Generate Worksheets option. 1. Open the previously created report, GR## Multi. a) b) 2. From the EPM Ribbon, choose Open → Open from Server Report Folder. Choose Company(Public) → Reports then GR## Multi and choose Open. Generate multiple worksheets based on Entity. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Report Actions → Worksheet Generation. The EPM - Worksheet Generation window opens. b) Under Dimensions, choose Entity. c) Then choose the Select Members button. The EPM - Member Selector opens. d) Under Dimension Members, place a checkbox next to Store1, Store2, and Store3. (You will find this under Store Type Consolidation → Small Store Consolidated... but the Store numbers may not be in order!) e) Move these entries using the blue arrow pointing right. f) Then choose OK. Note: If you receive the Dynamic Relationship - Warning choose Yes. g) Then choose OK to close the EPM - Worksheet Generation window. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 193
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 122: Worksheet Generation The EPM add-in will generate three additional worksheets for you; one for each store. It will also leave your unfiltered report in Sheet1. 194 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Multi-Source Reporting Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create a workbook with two different reports from two different connections. • Create two reports that share a row axis. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 195
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn how to use the EPM Functions and how to do cell based reporting. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • • • Use EPM functions to pull in descriptions and properties into your reports Create reports and input forms from scratch Discuss the most important delivered EPM functions Perform smart variance calculations Use the time offset function Set up a push button Business Example You need to add header information to your reports and you also need to convert an existing planning excel spreadsheet so you can use it against the central database. Function Categories There are three function categories for EPM: 1. 2. 3. EVFunctions (Deprecated) - obsolete EV functions EPMFunctions - delivered EPM functions FPMXLClient.TechnicalCategory - system internal use If you work with reports that have been created with former versions of Planning and Consolidation (before version 10), some functions beginning with EV continue to work but their names are not automatically converted into EPM. From version 10, the names of the functions begin with EPM. All the functions beginning with EV are gathered under the EVFunctions (Deprecated) category. 196 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports How to Access Functions Below, you can see the options for how to access functions. • • • Type in the formula bar Insert function button Access Autocomplete by entering =EPM in a cell Below, you can see the dialog box when you insert an EPM Function: Hint: When you choose a function, the description appears in the lower area of the dialog box. Figure 123: Inserting an EPM Function Delivered EPM Functions You can use the EPM functions to pull in metadata into your reports for display or for reference purposes. The EPM functions are formulas that enable you to retrieve specific information or data and to make a report behave in a certain way, providing power and flexibility. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 197
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Here is an example of a delivered EPM function: Hint: By clicking in each field, you can see the description of each parameter in the lower area of the dialog box. Figure 124: The EPMContextMember Function Below, you can see a list of the most important EPM functions. • • • • • • • • 198 EPMSaveComment - enter or modify a comment for a full set of members, in a specified cell. EPMDimensionOverride - Override the member selection for a specific report. EPMMemberID - retrieves the unique name of a specified dimension member that is included in a report. EPMUser - retrieves the login for the specified connection. EPMEnvDatabaseID - retrieves the name of the environment or database for the specified connection. EPMModelCubeID - retrieves the name of the model or cube for the specified connection. EPMAxisOverride - override one or several dimensions (and their members) for a specified axis (row or column axis). EPMCopyRange - add and repeat the content of a range of cells until the bottom (columns) or the right side (rows) of a report is reached. This is similar to the 7.x concept of using multiple row or column key ranges. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports • EPMInsertCellsBeforeAfterBlock - insert cells before or after a block of members for a specified dimension. Note: This is similar to the 7.x concept of the before range. • EPMReportOptions - override the options for one or more reports. The override applies to a report only if the Inherit Sheet Options option is not selected in the Options tab of the Report Editor. • • • • • • • • • • • • • EPMDimensionProperty - retrieves the properties of a specified dimension in a specified cell range. EPMMemberDesc - retrieves the description of the specified dimension member. EPMMemberOffset - retrieves a member related to another member by specifying an offset from a given member to retrieve the previous or subsequent member. EPMSelectMember - retrieves a specified dimension member when you double-click the cell containing the function. EPMScaleData - retrieves data for a full set of members, and scales the data. EPMSaveComment - enter or modify a comment for a full set of members. EPMSaveData - enter or modify a data for a full set of members EPMWorkStatus - retrieves the work status for a model and data intersection. EPMComparison - calculates variances with a sign dependant to the relevant account's acctype property. For example, if the actual is above the plan value for a revenue account, the variance is positive. EPMURL - launches the specified web client component. EPMBook - retrieves a specified text you can double-click to open a book published in Planning and Consolidation web client. EPMLink - retrieves a specified text on which you double-click to open a report contained in another file, that is a Microsoft Excel workbook, a Word document or a PowerPoint presentation. The context is passed along. EPMExecuteAPI - execute API's (application programming interface) directly from a worksheet cell. EPMDimensionOverride Parameters Override the member selection for a specified dimension in one or several reports. The dimension member selection performed in the Member Selector is replaced by a specific cell or range of cells. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 199
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Below, you can see the relevant parameters for this function. • • • ReportID - ID of one or several reports. Dimension - Specify the dimension name. Members - Members you want to select for the specified dimension. The members will override the members selected in the report. EPMAxisOverride Parameters This function enables you to override one or several dimensions (and their members) for a specified axis (row or column axis). When you enter the function and then click Enter, the member override is reflected in the EPM pane, but not in the report. To reflect the override, refresh the report. Below, you can see the relevant parameters for this function. • • • • ReportID - ID of one or several reports. Row axis - Specify which axis will be overridden. Enter TRUE to override the row axis, FALSE to override the column axis. Dimensions - On a Planning and Consolidation connection, specify the dimension name. Members - Members that will override the members currently in the report(s). Note: If you enter EUR,,USD and empty row will be inserted between the members. You can also use 7.5 memberset keywords such as BAS, which means base level members. The master report takes precedence over the other reports. To specify a dimension, you can select the cell in which a dropdown list retrieves the dimensions, with the EPMDimensionList function. If another dimension is selected from the dropdown list, the dimension change will be taken into account in the EPMAxisOverride function. You should not use the EPMAxisOverride function more than once on the same axis and the same report. If you enter one function for the row axis and one for the column axis, the row axis takes precedence over the column axis. 200 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports EPMReportOptions Parameters This function enables you to override the options for one or more reports. The override applies to a report only if the Inherit Sheet Options option is not selected in the Options tab of the Report Editor. • • ReportID - ID of one or several reports. Options - Specify the options that will override the existing report options. In the options parameter, you can specify one or more options. Use a semicolon, “;” to separate the options. Here is an example: To activate this FreezeDataRefresh option, enter: FreezeDataRefresh=true. To deactivate it, enter: FreezeDataRefresh=false. EPMMemberSortingOverride Parameters Override the member sorting and grouping that has been previously defined using the interface (Member Sorting and Grouping area in the Member Selector), for a specified dimension, in one or several reports. • • • • • ReportID - ID of one or several reports. Dimension - Specify the dimension name. Sort - Specify if you want to enable the member sorting. Enter TRUE to enable the sorting, FALSE if you do not want to enable the sorting. AscendingOrder - Specify if you want to sort the members by ascending or descending order. Enter TRUE to sort members by ascending order, FALSE to sort members by descending order. Property - Name of the property to sort the members on. The values of the specified property will be by ascending or descending order, depending on the parameter. In the Property parameter, you can reference the cell in which the EPMDimension- Property function has been entered. • • 2011 AddLocalMember- Before - Specify if you want to insert a grouping local member the before the set of members. Enter TRUE to insert the grouping local member. Optional. AddLocalMember- After - Specify if you want to insert a grouping local member the after the set of members. Enter TRUE to insert the grouping local member. Optional. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 201
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 EPMContextMember Parameters This function retrieves the context member for the specified dimension. When you double-click the cell containing the function, a dialog box opens, displaying all the members for the specified dimension. You can select another member and the context is changed. The list of members can be optionally filtered, using the dimension properties. • • • Name of the connection - Optional. If not specified, the active connection is taken into account. Dimension - Dimension name Filter - Optional. Filter by property to return only members with specified property values. Example: EPMContextMember("Finance","Entity","CALC=N;GROUP=SALES"). For the Finance connection, the context member of the dimension Entity is displayed in the cell. If you double-click the cell, a dialog box displays a list of all entity members filtered by CALC=N and by GROUP=SALES EPMDimensionProperty Parameters This function retrieves the properties of a specified dimension in a specified cell range. • • • Name of the connection - Optional. If not specified, the active connection is taken into account. Dimension - Name of the dimension for which you want to return the properties. Destination range - Cell range in which the properties will be displayed. EPMMemberProperty Parameters This function retrieves the value of a specified property for a specified member. • • • Name of the connection - Optional. If not specified, the active connection is taken into account. Member - Member name. Mandatory. Property - Property name. Mandatory. EPMMemberOffset Parameters This function retrieves a member related to another member by specifying an offset from a given member to retrieve the previous or subsequent member. 202 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports The cell containing the EPMMemberOffset function increments members based on the member selected. By default, if the optional Level parameter is not included, the member at the same level as the member specified is incremented. You can use a negative offset. • • • • Name of the connection - Optional. If not specified, the active connection is taken into account. Member - Member to start from. Offset - Specify the number of member increments. Level - Specify the hierarchy level. Optional. Example: EPMMemberOffset("Finance",D4,"1") If cell D4 contains 2009.Q1, and no level is specified, an increment of 1 returns the member 2009.Q2, and an increment of 2 returns 2009.Q3, and so on. If cell D4 contains 2009.TOTAL, an increment of 1 returns 2010.TOTAL. EPMMemberOffset can be used if you for trend reports by using the offset feature. Figure 125: EPMMemberOffset Trending – Function 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 203
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 126: EPMMemberOffset Trending – Initial Result The EPMMemberOffset function automatically recognizes the time granularity. In the example below, the user selected Q1 for the first month and function automatically displayed quarters for the subsequent timeframes. Figure 127: Formula: EPMMemberOffset Quarters EPMScaleData Parameters This function retrieves data for a full set of members, and scales the data. Any member not specified is taken from the context. The data is divided by the number entered in the scale parameter and the result is displayed in the selected cell. When using a Planning and Consolidation connection, the division is performed only for accounts that are scalable. 204 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports If an account is not scalable, the original amount is displayed in the cell. • • • • Name of the connection - Optional. If not specified, the active connection is taken into account. Scale - Scale value such as 1000. Name of the connection - Optional. If not specified, the active connection is taken into account. Member - Member name. Optional. Note: You can view the scaling property of an account by selecting it in the sheet and then selecting EPM → More → Member Properties. Member id's are inherited from the context if not specified in the function. EPMSaveData Parameters This function enables you to enter or modify a data for a full set of members, in a specified cell. Any member not specified is taken from the context. Once you have entered or modified a data, you can perform a save, using the Save Data button. The modified data is saved to the server. • • • Cell - Cell in which the data will be retrieved. Name of the connection - Optional. Member - Member name. Optional. EPMDimensionList Parameters This function retrieves the list of all the dimensions of the model for the specified connection. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 205
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 You can display a list of the dimensions in the current cell or a drop down list. • Connection Name - Optional If blank the current connection is used. • Range - Optional Specify the cell or cells for the drop down list. If blank, the dimensions will be listed horizontally in the current cell. • Separator - Optional Add a separator such as a comma if the dimensions will be listed horizontally in the current cell. If blank, the list separator from your local settings will be used. EPMInsertCellsBeforeAfterBack Parameters This function inserts cells before or after a block of members for a specified dimension. • Report ID - Mandatory ID of one or several reports. • Dimension - Mandatory Specify the dimension name. • Before - Mandatory TRUE - insert the cells before. FALSE - insert the cells after. • Range - Mandatory Specify the cell range containing the content to be inserted such as formulas and styles. Below you can see an example where the difference between Budget and Actual is inserted in the gray columns. In this case, the extra columns were inserted after the block of category members. 206 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Figure 128: Example of EPMInsertCellsBeforeAfterBack 7.x and 10.0 Functions Cross Reference For those of you who worked on the prior releases, here is a cross reference of the prior versus new functions. Note: In some cases the functionality of the prior versus new function may not be exactly the same. 7.x and 10.0 Functions Cross Reference 7.x Function EVAPD EPMModelCubeDesc EVAPP EPMModelCubeID EVASD EPMEnvDatabaseDesc EVAST EPMEnvDatabaseID EVBET EPMComparison EVBNV EPMBook EVCOM EPMSaveComment EVCGP EPMCommentPartialContext EVCGT 2011 The analogous 10.0 Function EPMCommentFullContext © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 207
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 EVCLK EPMWorkStatus EVCVW EPMContextMember EVDES EPMMemberDesc EVDIM EPMDimensionType EVDNV EPMDocumentList EVGET EPMRetrieveData EVGTS EPMScaleData EVHNV EPMURL EVHOT EPMLink EVLCK EPMWorkStatus EVMBR EPMSelectMember EVMNU EPMExecuteAPI EVRNG EPMCopyRange EVPRO EPMMemberProperty EVRNG EPMCellRanges EVRTI EPMRefreshTime EVSND EPMSaveData EVSVR EPMServer EVTIM EPMMemberOffset EVUSR EPMUser OSCLD EPMDocument Unsupported EV Functions The following EV functions are not supported in the EPM add-in: EvALK, EvASV, EvBLK, EvCLK, EvDLK, EvENE, EvEXP, EvHOT, EvINP, EvLIK, EvLST, EvMEM, EvMSG, EvNXP, EvPLK, EvPOV, EvPXR, EvSEN, EvSET, EvSLK, OsAMT. Building a Cell Based Template In some cases, customers may want to create a template without using an EPM report. This could occur in situations where you have a template in a legacy system that is cell based for example. 208 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports In the example below, you can see a native excel sheet has been integrated by using EPM functions. Figure 129: Native Excel With EPM Functions But Without An EPM Report How to Use Buttons Buttons are used to make navigation easier for end users and also to create an attractive user interface. To use buttons in Excel templates, you must first access visual basic and turn on the FPMXLClient via Tools → References. Hint: To turn on the Developers tab, go to the Office Button → Excel Options → Select Show Developer tab in the Ribbon → OK. In the example below, you can see how to add a button to send data. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 209
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 130: Adding a Button APIs - Application Programming Interfaces You can perform some tasks (reporting and input tasks, user interface actions, and so on) by using the provided APIs in Visual Basic for Applications (VBA). These APIs are accessible via standard MS Excel commands. In Visual Basic, choose View → Object Browser. In the dropdown list on the top, select FPMXLClient . In the list of classes. The EPMAddinAutomation API class contains the macros that can executed for the EPM add-in (but cannot be used with the EPMExecuteAPI function). The IEPMExecuteAPI class exposes all the macros that you can execute directly from a worksheet cell, by using the EPMExecuteAPI function. EPM Execute API Function This function enables you to execute APIs directly from a worksheet cell. When you click the cell where you insert the function, the API is executed. 210 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Figure 131: EPM Execute API Function Custom VBA Functions - Event Based You can customize your VBA code by associating the events listed below. You can use these custom functions when you build Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) modules. • • • • • • 2011 BEFORE_CONTEXTCHANGE - Use this function to execute a custom operation before changing the context. AFTER_CONTEXTCHANGE - Use this function to execute a custom operation after changing the context. BEFORE_REFRESH - Use this function to execute a custom operation before the system refreshes the data. AFTER_REFRESH - Use this function to execute a custom operation after the system refreshes the data. BEFORE_SAVE - Use this function to execute a custom operation before the system saves data into the database. AFTER_SAVE - Use this function to execute a custom operation after the system saves data into the database. The return values to use for all these events are: true or false. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 211
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 212 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 BPC430 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Exercise 8: Using Basic EPM Functions Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Work with the EPM functions • Build a cell-based report Business Example Your end users need a way to add header information to their reports, so you need to know how the relevant EPM functions work. You also need to take a native excel workbook and configure it to send data. Task 1: Open a native excel workbook and configure the header. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 2. Ensure you have the SALES -BPC430_## connection selected. 3. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description Category FCST_JAN - FCST_JAN Entity STORE1 - Store1 Product BIRDGOURMET - Gormet Bird Food P_Acct CE0001000 - Total Costs RPTCurrency LC - Local Currency Time 2012.01 - 12-Jan Measures PERIODIC - Periodic 4. Open the native excel workbook from the company folder and switch it to an input form. 5. Enter the following text: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 213
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Cell Text A1 Environment A2 Model A3 Model Description A4 BPC430 Server 6. Use the EPM function EPMEnvDatabaseID to display the Environment ID in B1. 7. Use the EPM function EPMModelCubeID to display the Model ID in B2. 8. Use the EPM function EPMModelCubeDesc to display the model description in B3. 9. Use the EPM function, EPMServer, to display the Server URL in B4. 10. Use the EPM function, EPMDimensionType, to display the currency dimension in A5. 11. Use the EPM function, EPMDimensionType, to display the entity dimension in A6. 12. Use the EPM function, EPMDimensionType, to display the category dimension in A7. 13. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the currency context member in B5. 14. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the entity context member in B6. 15. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the category context member in B7. Task 2: Configure the column headers and report description. 1. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the entity context member in G13. 2. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the category context member in G14. 3. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the time context member in C16. Continued on next page 214 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports 4. Use the EPM function, EPMMemberOffset, to display the 2012.02 time context member in D16. 5. Copy the EPMMemberOffset function to the remaining months. Task 3: Configure the template to send data. 1. Use the EPM function, EPMSaveData, in cell O17 to send and refresh data. Assign the account in the row and time in the column. The remaining members will be inherited from the context. 2. Copy the function to the relevant rows and columns. 3. From the EPM tab, Save the template as GR## EPM Functions. 4. Test the save data function by entering 2600 for Personnel Expense in January. 5. Send in the rest of the data for all 12 months as shown below: Account Value Personnel Expense 2600 Wages and Salaries 3000 Social Contributions 400 Advertising Expenses 50 TV & Radio 10 Magazines 40 Energy & Water Costs 700 Steam 1000 Hint: If the EPM Ambiguous name window appears for any entry, just close it. 6. 2011 Save the template GR## EPM Functions again. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 215
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Solution 8: Using Basic EPM Functions Task 1: Open a native excel workbook and configure the header. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) In the Web Client Start Page select EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager opens after a few seconds. Note: If you are already logged into Excel, go to Step 2. b) Select the Sales - BPC430_## connection. c) Choose OK. The EPM Pane appears on the right. 2. Ensure you have the SALES -BPC430_## connection selected. a) b) 3. From the EPM ribbon, choose Open → Change Connection. If the SALES - BPC430_## connection is not selected, choose it. Choose OK. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description Category FCST_JAN - FCST_JAN Entity STORE1 - Store1 Product BIRDGOURMET - Gormet Bird Food P_Acct CE0001000 - Total Costs RPTCurrency LC - Local Currency Time 2012.01 - 12-Jan Measures PERIODIC - Periodic a) Set your context selections as shown above. Continued on next page 216 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports 4. Open the native excel workbook from the company folder and switch it to an input form. a) In the EPM tab, choose Open → Open Server Root Folder → Native Excel → Open A native excel workbook opens with accounts in the rows and months in the columns. b) c) 5. Choose Options → Sheet Options . Select Use as Input Form→ OK. Enter the following text: Cell Text A1 Environment A2 Model A3 Model Description A4 Server a) b) In cell A2, enter Model. c) In cell A3, enter Model Description. d) 6. In cell A1, enter Environment. In cell A4, enter Server. Use the EPM function EPMEnvDatabaseID to display the Environment ID in B1. a) In Excel, choose the Formulas tab. b) In cell B1, choose the Excel Insert Function button. c) Next to the Or select a category field, select EPMFunctions d) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMEnvDatabaseID e) Leave the Connection name blank: Note: By leaving the Connection Name blank, the active connection will be inherited. f) Choose OK The Environment Id is displayed in cell B1. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 217
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 7. BPC430 Use the EPM function EPMModelCubeID to display the Model ID in B2. a) In cell B2, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMModelCubeID. c) Choose OK The Model ID is displayed in cell B2. 8. Use the EPM function EPMModelCubeDesc to display the model description in B3. a) In cell B3, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function double click EPMModelCubeDesc. c) Choose OK. The Model Description is displayed in cell B3. 9. Use the EPM function, EPMServer, to display the Server URL in B4. a) In cell B4, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMServer. c) Choose OK. The Sever is displayed in cell B4. 10. Use the EPM function, EPMDimensionType, to display the currency dimension in A5. a) In cell A5, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under the Select a Function, double-click EPMDimensionType. c) In Dimension Type, enter R → Choose OK. RPTCURRRENCY is displayed in cell A5. 11. Use the EPM function, EPMDimensionType, to display the entity dimension in A6. a) In cell A6, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMDimensionType . c) In Dimension Type, enter E → Choose OK. Entity is displayed in cell A6. Continued on next page 218 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports 12. Use the EPM function, EPMDimensionType, to display the category dimension in A7. a) In cell A7, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMDimensionType. c) In Dimension Type, enter C → Choose OK. CATEGORY is displayed in cell A7. 13. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the currency context member in B5. a) In cell B5, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMContextMember. c) In the Dimension parameter, enter A5 → Choose OK The current context member LC is displayed in cell B5. 14. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the entity context member in B6. a) In cell B6, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMContextMember. c) In the Dimension parameter, enter A6 → Choose OK. The current context member STORE1 is displayed in cell B6. You can also double-click in cell B5 to change the context. Note: The Filter List can be used provide a filtered default list when the cell is double-clicked. For example, a parameter such as CURRENCY=CHF could be used to return a default list of entities that have the currency property value of CHF. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 219
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 15. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the category context member in B7. a) In cell B7, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMContextMember. c) In the Dimension parameter, enter A7 → Choose OK Figure 132: Report Header The current context member FCST_JAN is displayed in cell B7. Task 2: Configure the column headers and report description. 1. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the entity context member in G13. a) In cell G13, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMContextMember. c) In the Dimension parameter, enter A6 → Choose OK. The current context member, STORE1, is displayed in cell G13. 2. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the category context member in G14. a) In cell G14, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMContextMember. c) In the Dimension parameter, enter A7 → Choose OK. The current context member, FCST_JAN, is displayed in cell G14. Continued on next page 220 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports 3. Use the EPM function, EPMContextMember, to display the time context member in C16. a) In cell C16, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double click EPMContextMember. c) In the Dimension parameter, enter Time → Choose OK The current context member 2012.01 is displayed in cell C16. 4. Use the EPM function, EPMMemberOffset, to display the 2012.02 time context member in D16. a) In cell D16, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMMemberOffset. c) In the Member parameter, enter C16. The current context member 2012.01 is read from C16. d) In the Offset parameter, enter 1. Then Choose Ok. 2012.02 is derived from the member in C16 plus 1 month. 5. Copy the EPMMemberOffset function to the remaining months. a) Copy cell D16 b) Paste to E16 - N16. All 12 months of 2012 are in the columns. Figure 133: Report Header and Columns Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 221
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Task 3: Configure the template to send data. 1. Use the EPM function, EPMSaveData, in cell O17 to send and refresh data. Assign the account in the row and time in the column. The remaining members will be inherited from the context. a) In cell O17, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMSaveData. c) In the Cell parameter, enter C17. Data can now be entered in C17 and sent to the data base. d) In the Member1 parameter, enter $A17. The account member CE0004010 is read from A17. e) In the Member2 parameter, enter C$16. The time member 2012.JAN is read from C16. Figure 134: EPMSaveData Function f) Choose OK. #RFR appears in the cell indicating that the data needs to be refreshed from the data base. Continued on next page 222 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports 2. Copy the function to the relevant rows and columns. a) b) In cell O18 to O24, choose Paste. c) 3. In cell O17, choose Copy. Copy O17:24 to the P - Z columns. From the EPM tab, Save the template as GR## EPM Functions. a) b) Choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. c) Choose Company(Public) → Reports. d) In the File Name field, enter: GR## EPM Functions e) 4. Choose the EPM tab. Choose Save. Test the save data function by entering 2600 for Personnel Expense in January. a) Enter 2600 in cell C17. b) Click Save Data → Save Worksheet Data. c) To send the data, choose Yes. The Save Results dialog box is displayed. d) 5. Click OK. Send in the rest of the data for all 12 months as shown below: Account Value Personnel Expense 2600 Wages and Salaries 3000 Social Contributions 400 Advertising Expenses 50 TV & Radio 10 Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 223
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Magazines 40 Energy & Water Costs 700 Steam 1000 Hint: If the EPM Ambiguous name window appears for any entry, just close it. a) Enter the data as shown in the table. b) Click Save Data → Save Worksheet Data c) To send the data, choose Yes. The Save Results dialog box is displayed. d) 6. Click OK. Save the template GR## EPM Functions again. a) b) Choose Company(Public) → Reports. c) Since we already saved this once, choose the template GR## EPM Functions and then choose Save. d) 224 Choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. The overwrite warning message appears. Choose Yes. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Exercise 9: Using Advanced EPM Functions Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Work with the Dimension List function. • Use the Axis Override function. • Apply the Dimension Override function. • Explain when to use the Member Sorting Override function. • Describe the Insert Cells Before After Block function. • Explain the Copy Range function. Business Example Your end users have some cell-based reporting requirements, so you need to know how to use some of the more complex EPM cell-based functions to meet their needs more flexibly. Task 1: Create a new report. Create a new report to perform your testing. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Expense model in your BPC430_## environment. 2. Set your EPM Context as follows. Dimension P_Account PL600 - Net Income P_Category PLAN - Plan P_Cost DIRECT - Direct P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total Measures 3. Member ID - Description PERIODIC - Periodic Create a new report with the P_ACCOUNT dimension in the Row Axis and P_TIME in the Column Axis as shown below. Create the new report from cell F6. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 225
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 135: Report - Initial Results In the rows, select descendants for Net Income. 4. Switch the template to an input form and input sales values for Consulting. For each month, enter Plan values of 85000 for Third Party Sales and 25000 for Intercompany Sales. For each month, enter Budget values of 85000 for Third Party Sales and 25000 for Intercompany Sales. Continued on next page 226 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Task 2: Dimension List and Axis Override Use the EPMDimensionList and EPMAxisOerrride functions. The EPMDimensionList function is used to generate a dropdown list of dimensions. This function is used to control the expansion of members for a dimension via a cell-based formula. The EPMAxisOerrride function is used to control which dimensions appear in the rows, for example. It is also used to control which members are rendered based on 7.5 memberset keywords. 1. Add the EPMDimensionList function in cell A1, use a Range of A2, and select the P_COST dimension via the subsequent dropdown. 2. Set up the EPMAxisOerrride function as you see below in column B. Figure 136: Axis Override Set Up 3. Save this report in the Server root folder in Reports. Name it GR## Axis Override. Task 3: Dimension Override The EPMDimensionOverride function is used to control the expansion of members for a dimension via a cell based formula. 1. Use the EPMDimensionList dropdown to place P_ACCOUNT into the rows. Use the EPMAxisOerrride functions to select members based on the following criteria: PL600,LDEP(4,PL600). 2. Set up the EPMDimensionOverride function as shown below in column C: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 227
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 137: EPMDimensionOverride 3. Save this report in the Server root folder in Reports. Name it GR## Dimension Override. Task 4: Sorting Override Use the EPMMemberSortingOverride function to perform cell based sorting. 1. Set up the EPMMemberSortingOverride function as you see below in column D: Figure 138: Sorting Override Set Up 2. Save this report in the Server root folder in Reports. Name it GR## Sorting Override. Task 5: After Block Use the EPMInsertCellsBeforeAfterBlock function to add a column for budget versus actual reporting. 1. Use the EPMDimensionOverride function to display 2010.12, 2011.12, and 2012.12 in the columns. 2. Add P_CATEGORY to the columns. Include Budget and Actual. 3. Set up the EPMInsertCellsBeforeAfterBlock function as follows: Continued on next page 228 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Figure 139: After Block Set Up 4. Save this report in the Server root folder in Reports. Name it GR## After Block. Task 6: Copy Range Use the EPMCopyRange function to perform formula based formatting. 1. Set up the EPMCopyRange function as follows: Figure 140: Copy Range Set-Up Use the following formatting: F2 Use 1000 Separator(,) Light blue fill Numeric 0 Decimals Use 1000 Separator(,) Light green fill H2 2011 0 Decimals G2 2. Numeric Numeric 0 Decimals Use 1000 Separator(,) Light gray fill Save this report in the Server root folder in Reports. Name it GR## Copy Range. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 229
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Solution 9: Using Advanced EPM Functions Task 1: Create a new report. Create a new report to perform your testing. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Expense model in your BPC430_## environment. a) b) Choose the Expense - BPC430_## connection. c) 2. From your web client's Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel. Choose OK. Set your EPM Context as follows. Dimension Member ID - Description P_Account PL600 - Net Income P_Category PLAN - Plan P_Cost DIRECT - Direct P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total Measures PERIODIC - Periodic a) 3. Set your EPM Context as you see above. Create a new report with the P_ACCOUNT dimension in the Row Axis and P_TIME in the Column Axis as shown below. Create the new report from cell F6. Continued on next page 230 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Figure 141: Report - Initial Results Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 231
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 In the rows, select descendants for Net Income. a) In the EPM tab, choose Options → Sheet Options. b) Deselect Activate Member Recognition→ OK. c) Place your cursor in cell F6. d) From the EPM Ribbon, choose New Report. The EPM - Report Editor window opens. e) On the Options tab, deselect Do not Store Environment in the Connection. f) On the Layout tab, drag and drop the P_ACCOUNT dimension to the Row Axis Dimensions. g) Drag and drop the P_TIME dimension to the Column Axis Dimensions. h) Choose P_TIME in the Column Axis Dimensions. i) Select ID as the display. j) Select 2011.TOTAL. k) In Selection Relationship on the lower left, select Base Level. l) Choose the right arrow to move the selection to Selected Members. m) Similarly, choose the left arrow to remove the highlighted default selection. n) Choose OK to close the EPM - Member Selector. o) In the Row Axis Dimensions, click P_ACCOUNT. p) Select Net Income. q) In Selection Relationship on the lower left, select Descendants. r) Choose the right arrow to move the selection to Selected Members. s) Similarly, choose the left arrow to remove the highlighted default selection. t) Choose OK to close the EPM - Member Selector. u) Choose OK again to close the EPM - Report Editor. The Report is executed. 4. Switch the template to an input form and input sales values for Consulting. For each month, enter Plan values of 85000 for Third Party Sales and 25000 for Intercompany Sales. Continued on next page 232 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports For each month, enter Budget values of 85000 for Third Party Sales and 25000 for Intercompany Sales. a) Go to Options → Sheet Options. b) Select Use as Input Form. c) Choose OK. d) Set the context for P_COST to Consulting. e) Choose Refresh. f) For Jan to Dec, enter 150000 for Third Party Sales. g) For Jan to Dec, enter 25000 for InterComapny Sales. h) Select Save Data→ Yes → OK. i) Set the context for P_CATEGORY to Budget. j) Choose Refresh. k) For Jan to Dec, enter 150000 for Third Party Sales. l) For Jan to Dec, enter 25000 for InterComapny Sales. m) Select Save Data→ Yes → OK. n) Set the context for P_COST back to Direct. o) Set the context for P_CATEGORY back to Plan. p) Choose Refresh. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 233
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Task 2: Dimension List and Axis Override Use the EPMDimensionList and EPMAxisOerrride functions. The EPMDimensionList function is used to generate a dropdown list of dimensions. This function is used to control the expansion of members for a dimension via a cell-based formula. The EPMAxisOerrride function is used to control which dimensions appear in the rows, for example. It is also used to control which members are rendered based on 7.5 memberset keywords. 1. Add the EPMDimensionList function in cell A1, use a Range of A2, and select the P_COST dimension via the subsequent dropdown. a) From cell A1, choose the Excel Insert Function button. b) Next to Or select a category field, select EPMFunctions c) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMDimensionList. d) Enter the following Function Arguments: Connection Name Range A2 Separator e) Choose OK. Now you have a drop down list to select from a list of dimensions in cell A2. f) g) 2. In cell A2, select P_COST. Format cell A1 to F1 bold, italics, underscore. Set up the EPMAxisOerrride function as you see below in column B. Continued on next page 234 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Figure 142: Axis Override Set Up a) In cell B1, enter Axis Override. b) In cell B2, enter MEMBERS. c) From cell B3, choose the Excel Insert Function button. d) Under Select a Function, double click EPMAxisOerrride. e) Enter the following Function Arguments: ReportID Row Axis TRUE Dimension1 A2 Members1 f) “000” B2 Choose OK. In cell B2, the system returns Row definition 000. g) Choose Refresh. Members of the P_COST dimension now appear in the rows. Figure 143: Axis Override Result Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 235
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 3. BPC430 Save this report in the Server root folder in Reports. Name it GR## Axis Override. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. The Save window opens. b) On the left, choose the Company (Public) folder. c) Under the Template Library, choose Reports. d) Type the File Name GR## Axis Override. e) Choose Save. f) Remain in this report for the next step. Task 3: Dimension Override The EPMDimensionOverride function is used to control the expansion of members for a dimension via a cell based formula. 1. Use the EPMDimensionList dropdown to place P_ACCOUNT into the rows. Use the EPMAxisOerrride functions to select members based on the following criteria: PL600,LDEP(4,PL600). a) In cell A2, select P_ACCOUNT. b) In cell B2, enter PL600,LDEP(4,PL600). The parent account PL600 will appear first. Under PL600, the level dependent members of PL600 four levels down will be listed. c) 2. Choose Refresh. Set up the EPMDimensionOverride function as shown below in column C: Continued on next page 236 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Figure 144: EPMDimensionOverride a) In cell C1, enter Dimension Override. b) In cell C2, enter P_TIME. c) In cell C3, enter CALC=“N” AND YEAR=“2010”. This will be used to select members with properties values of “N” for CALC and “2010” for YEAR. d) From cell C4, choose the Excel Insert Function button. e) Under Select a Function double click EPMDimensionOverride. f) Enter the following Function Arguments: ReportID Dimension C2 Members g) “000” C3 Choose OK→ Refresh. Only the months for 2010 appear in the columns. 3. Save this report in the Server root folder in Reports. Name it GR## Dimension Override. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. The Save window opens. b) On the left choose the Company (Public) folder. c) Under the Template Library choose Reports. d) Type the File Name GR## Dimension Override. e) Choose Save. f) Remain in this report for the next step. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 237
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Task 4: Sorting Override Use the EPMMemberSortingOverride function to perform cell based sorting. 1. Set up the EPMMemberSortingOverride function as you see below in column D: Figure 145: Sorting Override Set Up a) In cell D1, enter Sorting Override. b) In cell D2, enter HLEVEL. This will allow the use of the HLEVEL property value to provide cell-based sorting. c) From cell D3, choose the Excel Insert Function button. d) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMMemberSortingOverride. e) Enter the following Function Arguments: ReportID Dimension A2 Sort TRUE Ascending Order TRUE Property f) “000” D2 Choose OK→ Refresh. Accounts are sorted in ascending order based on their HLEVEL value. Continued on next page 238 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Figure 146: Sorting Override Results g) Select Net Income → More → Member Properties... Net Income has an HLEVEL value of 1 and therefore shows up first. h) 2. Choose Close. Save this report in the Server root folder in Reports. Name it GR## Sorting Override. a) From the EPM Ribbon choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. The Save window opens. b) On the left, choose the Company (Public) folder. c) Under the Template Library choose Reports. d) Type the File Name GR## Sorting Override. e) Choose Save. f) Remain in this report for the next step. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 239
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Task 5: After Block Use the EPMInsertCellsBeforeAfterBlock function to add a column for budget versus actual reporting. 1. Use the EPMDimensionOverride function to display 2010.12, 2011.12, and 2012.12 in the columns. a) b) 2. In cell C3, enter 2010.12,2011.12,2012.12. Choose Refresh. Add P_CATEGORY to the columns. Include Budget and Actual. a) b) Click on P_CATEGORY in the Column Axis. c) Select Budget and Actual. d) Under Selection Relationship select Member Only. e) Use the right arrow to add your selections to Selected Members. f) Use the left arrow to remove the default selection. g) 3. In the EPM pane, right-click P_CATEGORY → Move to Column Axis. Choose OK. Set up the EPMInsertCellsBeforeAfterBlock function as follows: Figure 147: After Block Set Up a) In cell E1, enter After Block. b) In cell E2, enter =C2-D2. The system will return #VALUE but that is OK. This is a relative formula which will be inserted after the range of P_CATEGORY values. c) Format cell E2 with a Fill of light gray. Continued on next page 240 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports d) From cell E3, choose the Excel Insert Function button. e) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMInsertCellsBeforeAfterBlock . f) Enter the following Function Arguments: ReportID Dimension P_CATEGORY Before FALSE Range g) “000” E2 Choose OK→ Refresh. Columns H, K, and N are added with formulas which calculated Budget minus Actual. Figure 148: After Block Result h) Select cell H5 . You can see the function added by the system. Choose the Insert Function button. In the Caption field, enter “VarVariance”. Repeat for the other two variance columns. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 241
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 4. BPC430 Save this report in the Server root folder in Reports. Name it GR## After Block. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. b) On the left, choose the Company (Public) folder. c) Under the Template Library, choose Reports. d) Type the File Name GR## After Block. e) Choose Save. Task 6: Copy Range Use the EPMCopyRange function to perform formula based formatting. 1. Set up the EPMCopyRange function as follows: Figure 149: Copy Range Set-Up Use the following formatting: F2 Numeric 0 Decimals Use 1000 Separator(,) Light blue fill G2 Numeric 0 Decimals Use 1000 Separator(,) Light green fill H2 Numeric 0 Decimals Use 1000 Separator(,) Light gray fill a) In cell F1, enter Cell Based Formatting. b) Format F2 - H2 as shown above. c) From cell F3, choose the Excel Insert Function button. d) Under Select a Function, double-click EPMCopyRange. e) Enter the following Function Arguments: Continued on next page 242 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports ReportID Rows TRUE Before f) “000” F2:H2 Choose OK→ Refresh. Your output should be formatted as shown below: Figure 150: Copy Range Result 2. Save this report in the Server root folder in Reports. Name it GR## Copy Range. a) From the EPM Ribbon choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. The Save window opens b) c) Under the Template Library, choose Reports d) Type the File Name GR## Copy Range. e) 2011 On the left, choose the Company (Public) folder. Choose Save. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 243
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 244 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 BPC430 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Exercise 10: Using VBA in Buttons Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use a button to send data. Business Example Your end users need a way send data via a button. Task 1: Open a delivered input template. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. Note: If you already have Excel open go to Step 2. 2. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description Category FCST_JAN - FCST_JAN Entity STORE1 - Store1 PRODUCT BIRDGOURMET - Gormet Bird Food P_Acct CE0001000 - Total Costs RPTCurrency LC - Local Currency Time 2012.01 - 12.Jan Measures PERIODIC - Periodic 3. Open the Dynamic Report with Nested Rows to view the data for indirect expenses. 4. Go to Visual Basic and turn on the FPMXLClient. 5. Enter the following VBA in the workspace as shown below. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 245
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 151: VBA 6. Insert a button around cell C2. Figure 152: Assign Macro Task 2: Send data with your new button. 1. 2. 246 Enter a value and send it. Save the template as GR## VBA Example. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Solution 10: Using VBA in Buttons Task 1: Open a delivered input template. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. Note: If you already have Excel open go to Step 2. a) In the Web Client Start Page select EPM Office Add-in Excel The EPM - Connection Manager opens after a few seconds b) Select the Sales - BPC430_## connection. c) Choose OK. The EPM Pane appears on the right. 2. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description Category FCST_JAN - FCST_JAN Entity STORE1 - Store1 PRODUCT BIRDGOURMET - Gormet Bird Food P_Acct CE0001000 - Total Costs RPTCurrency LC - Local Currency Time 2012.01 - 12.Jan Measures PERIODIC - Periodic a) Set your context selections as shown in the table. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 247
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 3. BPC430 Open the Dynamic Report with Nested Rows to view the data for indirect expenses. a) In the EPM ribbon, select Open → Open Server Root Folder... Figure 153: Open Server Root Folder The Open dialog box is displayed. b) On the left of the dialog box, choose Company(Public) → Input Schedules → Templates . c) Select the Input Form with Nested Rows. d) Choose OK and Refresh. The template opens and displays the data for your context. Continued on next page 248 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports 4. Go to Visual Basic and turn on the FPMXLClient. a) Go to the Office Button → Excel Options → Select Show Developer tab in the Ribbon→ Choose OK. b) On the Developer tab, choose Visual Basic. c) Open the folders on the upper left, and double-click on Sheet1 as shown below: Hint: Make sure you are on VBAProject (Book#). Figure 154: Visual Basic d) Choose Tools → References. Available References are displayed. e) Select FPMXLClient and choose OK. The components of the FPMXLClient application will now be available. 5. Enter the following VBA in the workspace as shown below. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 249
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 155: VBA a) Close Visual Basic. Note: The macro is will be saved in the workbook. Now the VBA can be used in a push button. 6. Insert a button around cell C2. Continued on next page 250 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Figure 156: Assign Macro a) On the Developer tab, choose Insert → Button (Form Control). b) Draw a button around cell C2. c) Choose the macro as shown above. d) Choose OK. The macro is assigned to the push button and now you can enter a description. e) Type Send Data f) Left click in a cell away from the push button. The button is ready to be used. Task 2: Send data with your new button. 1. Enter a value and send it. a) Double-click on Personal Costs. b) Enter a value that is higher by 1 for January Personnel Expenses. c) Click the Send Data button. d) To send the data, choose Yes. The Save Results dialog box is displayed. e) Choose OK. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 251
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 2. Save the template as GR## VBA Example. a) On the EPM tab, choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder b) Choose Company(Public) → Input Schedules. c) In the File Name field enter: GR## VBA Example. d) 252 BPC430 Choose Save. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Basic and Advanced EPM Functions & Creating Cell Based Reports Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use EPM functions to pull in descriptions and properties into your reports • Create reports and input forms from scratch • Discuss the most important delivered EPM functions • Perform smart variance calculations • Use the time offset function • Set up a push button 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 253
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Lesson: Using Delivered Templates Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn about the delivered reports and input schedules in the Excel Interface of the EPM Add-in. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • Use delivered input schedules Use delivered reports Business Example You need to know about the delivered templates, because you want to use them to meet your business requirements. Delivered Reports and Input Templates In this section, you will learn about the delivered reports in the EPM add-in. 254 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Delivered Templates Figure 157: Delivered Reports and Input Templates Planning and Consolidation Connections In the Shell environment, dynamic templates are available within Microsoft Office EPM add-in. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 255
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 For the Finance model: • • 10 templates designed for reports. 5 templates designed for input forms. For the Rate model: • • 4 templates designed for reports. 3 templates designed for input forms. For the Ownership model: • • 2 templates designed for reports. No templates designed for input forms. You can find the templates in the following folders on the Planning and Consolidation server: • • Templates for input forms are stored in the Templates folder of the “Input Schedules” folder. Templates for reports are stored in the Templates of the Reports folder. Each workbook contains two worksheets: • • One sheet contains the template. You can connect the template to any model, then change the context members and the template continues to be valid. One sheet contains a dynamic formatting sheet that is applied to the template. These templates are XLTX files and therefore can be opened by more than one user at a time. Note: As a template can be used with various connections, the Do not Store Connection option in the EPM → Edit Report → Options is selected by default. 256 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Delivered Templates Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use delivered input schedules • Use delivered reports 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 257
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Lesson: Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports Lesson Overview In this lesson, we will review the key EvDRE features and identify how they are handled in EPM Reports. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • Use EvDRE templates in the EPM add-in Describe the key features of EvDRE templates Identify how EvDRE features are provided in the EPM Reports Business Example You have been using EvDRE templates and now you need to know how to perform the same reporting techniques in EPM Reports. EvDRE Overview • • • Stands for Everest Data Range Exchange Performs range-based sending and retrieval of data Used for both reports and input schedules The EvDRE function was used to generate large reports and input schedules with optimal performance. 258 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports Figure 158: Introduction to EvDRE • • • • By accepting cell ranges as parameters, EvDRE workbooks are faster to download and upload because there are no send or retrieve functions in the data cells. You can use EvDRE to build static workbooks (without expansions) as well as dynamic workbooks (with expansions), or workbooks where some dimensions are defined using static members while others dynamically expand. You can define one or more expansions on the rows, columns, or both simultaneously. Workbook options determine how EvDRE sends data. If the workbook option Type is set to Report, you cannot send data. If the option is set to Input Schedule, the template can retrieve and send data. Allows for easy creation of reports with multiple expansions. The EvDRE Builder The figure below shows the first step to create a report or input schedule using EvDRE in prior releases. EvDRE templates cannot be created in the EPM add-in without creating ranges manually. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 259
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 159: Building an EvDRE Report in 7.5 The EvDRE Builder in 7.5 was used to create the structure of the template and also to create ranges. For new reports, customers should use the EPM add-in. Therefore, the EvDRE function does not offer the EvDRE wizard to create reports. This is a screenshot from 7.5. Figure 160: The EvDRE Builder in 7.5 Once the results were generated ,the report could then be modified by changing the report definition using Excel formulas.
    • BPC430 Lesson: Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports Figure 161: Initial EvDRE Results In prior releases, expand all was used to refresh data, perform expansions, and to execute report changes. Figure 162: The 7.5 Expand All Option 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 261
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 7.5 Workbook Options In prior releases, workbook options were used to control refresh behavior, for example. Figure 163: 7.5 Workbook Options Components of EvDRE templates EvDRE templates included the following components. 262 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports Figure 164: EvDRE: Main Ranges The Page Key Range The Page Key Range was used to control data selections based on the current view. Figure 165: Multiple Members in the Page Key Range Multiple EvDREs Multiple EvDREs were used in workbooks in prior releases to display different data selections, for example, or to perform cross-application reporting. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 263
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 166: Multiple EvDREs Static EvDRE Reports EvDRE templates were sometimes converted to static templates by turning off the expansion range. Figure 167: Static Columns: Budget versus Actual Property Filters The EvDRE filter builder was used automatically generate MDX filters in the P_ACCT memberset below. 264 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports Figure 168: Memberset MDX Sheet Expansions The EvDRE function was also used to generate multiple sheet expansions. Figure 169: Multi Sheet: Builder The system will name each sheet for the member expanded into it, thereby creating a book of reports. Each sheet is essentially a replica of the starting EvDRE function. The starting sheet and the other “expanded” sheets will have the expansion dimension id hard coded into the page key which means the current view no longer can be used for the sheet dimension. As an alternative, you could use a memberset in the first sheet such as BAS(CONREGION). 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 265
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Options EvDRE reports with the enable options range selected use the EVRNG function to reference the generated option range shown below. Figure 170: Option Table The 7.5 options are described below: AutofitCol Automatically adjusts the size of the columns containing the EvDRE ranges to fit the content after refreshing data. Bottom n Shows only the specified number (n) of the lowest values in the entire data range. DumpDataCache The content of the data cache is written in the log file EvDRE_log.txt. ExpandOnly Disables the refresh action and performs only an expansion, when requested. The system does not retrieve data from the database. GroupExpansion If you use dynamic hierarchies, you can expand on Entity and Group at the same time. Any fixed group dimension structure used in statutory dynamic hierarchies remains intact in EvDRE reporting. 266 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports HideColKeys and HideRowKeys Hides the corresponding key ranges. NoRefresh Prevents the system from refreshing data from the database NoSend Prevents the system from sending data to the database. PctInput Enforces a different percentage of input data to trigger SQL queries (default is 20%) QueryEngine Manual (or blank for Automatic) QueryType NEXJ,TUPLE (or blank for Automatic) QueryViewName Use a user-defined view for querying SQL data. ShowComments Add an Excel comment in any DataRange cell with a formula, if the value retrieved from the database differs from the one displayed by the formula. ShowNullAsZero All empty cells in the data range are filled with zeros. SortCol Sorts a given column. SQLOnly Forces the query engine to only issue SQL queries. SumParent Inserts new rows with subtotals. SuppressDataRow and SuppressDataCol Performs a suppression on the defined data range directly in Excel. SuppressNodata 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 267
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Prevent the suppression of zero values. Only missing (no data) values are suppressed. Otherwise, both zeros and missing data are suppressed. Top n Shows only the specified number (n) of the highest values in the entire data range. Before and After Ranges Use before and after ranges to separate report results into sections, use range based formatting, and sub totaling. Figure 171: Before Range Expansion In the example below, rows are inserted by the system for each store. 268 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports Figure 172: Ranges – Before Range Result Formatting In prior releases formatting was accomplished with a 6 column style sheet in each EvDRE template. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 269
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Figure 173: The default EvDRE formatting grid Sorting Sorting and sub totalling was performed by turning on the sorting and sub totalling feature. 270 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports Figure 174: Sorting with a break total in the EvDRE Builder Multiple Row and Column Key Ranges Since EvDRE is an array-based tool, it will generate a continuous set of row and column data. However, that may make it difficult to do your analysis. You can use multiple row and column key ranges to break the results up into blocks for easier analysis. As an example, what if you wanted a report that shows account by entity such as the one below? Figure 175: Row Key Range: Result 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 271
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 EvDRE and EPM Comparison EvDRE versus EPM Add-in: Connections and Data Selections EvDRE EPM add-in Connection Wizard Connections Cross Application Reporting Cross Data Source Reporting (across Environments) within an Application Set Current View EPM Context Note: (1) Reporting on multiple Environments is possible. EvDRE vs. EPM add-in: Ranges EvDRE EPM add-in Page Key Range Page Axis Col Key Range Column Axis Row Key Range Row Axis Get Only Range Read Only Data Format Range Formatting Sheet Option Range EPM Report Editor Options Sort Range Data Sorting tab Using EvDRE Templates in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. Prior to the EPM add-in, reporting in Business Planning and Consolidation was done with EvDRE templates, reports and input schedules. In 10.0, the EvDRE function has been completely redeveloped so that former EvDRE reports and templates can be used as is. When you use an EvDRE templates in the EPM add-in, please note the following: • • • • 272 Expand is available. Workbook Options are available. Workbooks can contain either EvDRE or EPM Reports. EvDRE Builder is not available. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Comparing EvDRE to EPM Reports Figure 176: EvDRE Recognized in 10.0 Using the EPM Add-in SP04 Patch 01, you can open and use EvDRE reports or input schedules created in version BPC 7.5. Once the existing EvDRE function is validated,, the EPM add-in ribbon will change and display an Expand button. Note: Workbook options only pertain to EvDRE templates. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 273
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use EvDRE templates in the EPM add-in • Describe the key features of EvDRE templates • Identify how EvDRE features are provided in the EPM Reports 274 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates Lesson Overview The new SAP Business Objects EPM Solutions add-in for Microsoft Office 10.0 has been completely developed from scratch. Thus, the former Application Programming Interface (API) used in SAP Business Objects Planning and Consolidation 7.5 is not usable anymore. For this reason, you want to know what steps are necessary to use your existing EvDRE reports and input templates. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • Migrate EvDRE templates. Business Example Your company or client still uses EvDRE templates so you need to know how migrate them. Migration options Both EvDRE input schedules as well as reports from 7.5 can be migrated. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 275
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 When you migrate an EvDRE template, the following actions occur: • • • • • • • • Row and column expansions are migrated. EV functions are retained. Empty rows and columns are migrated. A formatting sheet is created with the original styles. Sorting, ranking, suppressing, insert options, and column shifts are not migrated. VBA is not migrated. A copy of the original template is created if migrated from the application server. A Log is generated. Hint: You can find the log under the More button. It includes items that are not migrated as well. • Protected workbooks/sheets are not migrated. If an EvDRE contains several report ranges, the RowKeyRange contains more than one range and the ColKeyRange also; the lowest number of ranges determines the number of reports to be migrated. For example, if the RowKeyRange contains 2 ranges and the ColKeyRange contains 3 ranges, 2 reports will be created. The first report will use the first range of the RowKeyRange and the first range of the ColKeyRange. The second report will use the second range of the RowKeyRange and the second and third ranges of the ColKeyRange, if the ranges are on the same row, or the second range of the ColKeyRange (and the third range is not migrated), if the ranges are not on the same row. As a general rule, the EPM add-in supports the share of an entire axe (that is the exact same range of cells), not just a part of it. Also, an axis can be shared only if the reports that share the axis are on the same model. The ranges for BeforeRange and AfterRange are migrated, based on the EPM function called "EPMInsertCellsBeforeAfterBlock". After migration, in the BeforeRange or AfterRange row, the cell that contains the EPMInsertCellsBeforeAfterBlock function appears in yellow. So that the migrated report continues to function, do not delete the cell in yellow. You can move it to another cell in the sheet. 276 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates Caution: The migration of a worksheet or a workbook can only be performed once. For this reason, it is recommended that you make a copy of your 7.5 workbooks before migrating. The following ranges are not migrated: • • • CellKeyRange You can use the EPM add-in equivalent features, depending on what you want to do: the Keep Formula on Data option, or local members. GetOnlyRange You can use the EPM add-in equivalent feature: Read-only Data. SortRange You can use the EPM add-in equivalent feature: Data Sorting. . In an EPM add-in report (on a Planning and Consolidation connection), a dimension can be used only in one of the three axes (page, row or column). Therefore, if a dimension is used in the RowKeyRange or the ColKeyRange, and also in the PageKeyRange, once migrated, the dimension remains in the row or column axis, and the dimension is displayed in the page axis range just for your information, but it is not used and its member is not identified by a formula beginning with =EPMOlapMember(. For each KeyRange, the keys are migrated into EPMOlapMember. In the keys cells, the descriptions of members are displayed by default. You will then be able to choose another display name for members in the Member Selector dialog box. The headings are left in the sheet just for information (they are not identified as EPMOlapMember). After the migration, they will be automatically deleted as soon as you perform a refresh that changes the members displayed in the report. There is no equivalent to headings in the EPM add-in. Migration Prerequisites • • • • • • 2011 The EvDRE formula, the KeysRange and the ExpansionsRange must be on the same sheet PageKeyRange must be above the RowKeyRange and ColKeyRange ColKeyRange must be above the RowKeyRange RowKeyRange must be to the left of the ColKeyRange ExpandOnly option is not set to Y All the models are on the same environment in cases where you have several EvDRE's in one workbook © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 277
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Migration Steps Below, you can see the steps to perform a migration. Figure 177: EvDRE Migration If you select the Planning and Consolidation Server or Local option, the migrated workbooks do not overwrite the original workbooks. You can choose whether the original workbooks and the migrated workbooks will be stored in the same folder or in different ones, using the Do not move original workbooks in a different folder option. So that each original workbook is kept in the folder you select, choose the Do not move original workbooks in a different folder option. So for each workbook, the folder will contain: the original workbook, the migrated workbook and - only for folders that are not on the Planning and Consolidation server - one log file per workbook. Alternatively, you can also ask that the original workbooks are automatically moved to a dedicated folder called Migration Copy. Therefore, the folder you have selected will only contain the migrated workbooks. And the Migration Copy folder will contain the original workbooks and, only for folders that are not on the Planning and Consolidation server - one log file per workbook. 278 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates To do so, simply deselect the Do not move original workbooks in a different folder option. Note: An original workbook is automatically renamed the following way: #Copy of Original#[original name] Page Key Axis The EvDRE Page Key Axis is migrated according to the following criteria: Page Key Axis Migration Member Migrated or Not Identified by a formula beginning with =EVCVW( Is not taken into account. The formula remains after migration but is not migrated into a formula beginning with =EPMOlapMember(. Identified by a formula different from =EVCVW( Is migrated. The member is identified by a formula beginning with =EPMOlapMember( Hard-coded member For example: 2010.TOTAL Is migrated. The member is identified by a formula beginning with =EPMOlapMember( Several members separated by a comma For example: 2008.TOTAL,2009.TOTAL, 2010.TOTAL Is migrated. The members all together are identified by a formula beginning with =EPMOlapMultiMember(. When several members are selected for the same dimension in the page axis, the data on the members are automatically aggregated in the report. If the PageKeyRange references several ranges, all the ranges will be migrated into only one page axis for all the EvDRE reports Following this rule: if several members of the same dimension appear in the different ranges, only the first one read by the migration process is migrated. The other members of the dimension are still displayed but they are not recognized as an EPMOlapMember. In some cases, members are not recognized as valid members or simply not migrated. When a member is not recognized in the page axis (for example, a member has been deleted from the environment): 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 279
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 The following sentence is displayed in the log: The member '{0}' at position [{1},{2}] is not valid. The member remains in the page axis range just for your information, but it is not identified by a formula beginning with =EPMOlapMember(. RowKeyRange and ColKeyRange Members RowKeyRange and ColKeyRange Members Migration Member Migrated or Not Identified by any formula Is migrated. The member is identified by a formula beginning with =EPMOlap Member( Hard-coded member For example: 2010.TOTAL Is migrated. The member is identified by a formula beginning with =EPMOlapMember( ev_before and ev_after parameters Is migrated. The member is identified by a formula beginning with =EPMIn sertedMember( All member formulas are migrated. The formulas that reference other cells are also migrated and continue to reference the same cell. Members whose formulas begin with =EPMInsertedMember( are "fake" members, meaning that they do not have the standard behavior of members in the EPM add-in. These members ensure the continuity of the row or column axis. When there is more than one dimension in a row or in a column axis and if one member is not recognized, the entire row or column is not valid. See below. When migrated, the Microsoft Office Excel "General" number format is automatically applied to all the cells of the row and column axes. All the merged cells in the row and column axes are automatically unmerged during the migration process. If at least one of the row or column axes does not contain any member, the report is not migrated. In some cases, members are not recognized as valid members or simply not migrated. When a member is not recognized in a row or page axis (for example, a member has been deleted from the database). The following sentence is displayed in the log: The member '{0}' at position [{1},{2}] is not valid for the dimension '{3}' 280 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates The member cell is colored in magenta on a row or column created temporarily. You can easily spot the members that you will not find in your report. As soon as you perform a refresh on the report, the temporary rows and columns for the unrecognized members are deleted. ExpansionsRange The EXPANDIN parameters below are migrated: • • COL ROW SHEET is not migrated. If reports have already been generated based on the SHEET parameter, the reports can be migrated. The EPM add-in equivalent feature is: Workbook Sheets Automatic Generation. The values below are not migrated: • • Suppress You can use the EPM add-in equivalent feature: the Remove Empty Rows and Remove Empty Columns options. Insert You can use the EPM add-in equivalent feature: entering members directly in a sheet or using the Member Selector dialog box. During the migration process, the ExpansionsRange is read from left to right. When there are several dimensions in an axis, the inner and outer dimensions are therefore kept in the original order. EPM - EvDRE Migration Options • • • • • • Active worksheets can be migrated. An Active Workbook can be migrated. Workbooks can be migrated from the Planning and Consolidation Server. Workbooks can be migrated from the Local drive. A copy of the original template is created if migrated from the application server. A Log is generated. Hint: You can find the log under the More button. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 281
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 OptionsRange The following options are migrated: • • • • • • • • AutoFitCol - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Auto Fit Column Width. NoRefresh - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Freeze Data Refresh. NoSend - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Use as Input Form. ShowComments - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Keep Formula on Data and Show Source Data in Comments . SQLOnly - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Display only Base Level Data. ShowNullAsZero - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Empty Cell Default Value . SumParent - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Calculate Parents in Hierarchies. SuppressNodata - When the value is N or No, after migration, the Remove Empty Rows and Remove Empty Columns options are selected in the EPM add-in. When the value is Y or Yes, after migration, in the EPM add-in, the Remove Empty Rows and Remove Empty Columns options are selected and a filter on rows that contain 0 is created so that rows with zero are not displayed in the report. The following options are not migrated: • • • • • • • • • • • • • 282 Bottom - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Data Ranking. DumpDataCache - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Metadata Cache. ExpandOnly GroupExpansion - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Ownership-based Hierarchies. HideColKeys - In the EPM add-in, you can choose the name you want to display for members. Member Name to Display HideRowKeys - In the EPM add-in: you can choose the name you want to display for members. Member Name to Display PctInput QueryEngine QueryType QueryViewName SortCo- Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Member Sorting and Grouping feature in the Member Selector. SuppressDataCol - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Excluding Members. SuppressDataRow - Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Excluding Members. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates • Top Equivalent feature in the EPM add-in: Data Ranking. The Migration Log The migration log lists the migration steps and the items that are migrated or not. The latest lines of the log file can be displayed by selecting EPM → More → Log. Main Steps displayed in the log Explanations The EvDRE migration for the sheet [SheetName] is starting. Indicate the beginning of the analysis for a sheet. For each sheet migrated, this text appears. Indicate the number of EvDRE detected. There are [number] EvDRE functions Indicate the number of EvDRE detected. detected in the sheet. Start reading EvDRE options. Start analyzing EvDRE functions. The analysis will determine the number of reports that will be migrated. If an EvDRE or a report will not be migrated, this information is written below this step. Start process with EvDRE number [number]... The migration process starts for the EvDRE. For each EvDRE, this text appears. Start reading page axis. The page axis is read. Valid members are migrated. For each member that is not migrated, a text is displayed within this step. Start reading member definition. The page axis members are read from the ExpansionRange if there is one. Start reading formatting sheet... The format settings are analyzed. Start reading the report 000... 2011 Check that the ExpandOnly option is not set to Y or YES. If it is set to Y or YES, the EvDRE is not migrated. The report is read. For each report, this text appears. The row axis is read. Valid members are migrated. For each member that is not migrated, a text is displayed within this step. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 283
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Start reading row axis... The row axis is read. Valid members are migrated. For each member that is not migrated, a text is displayed within this step Start reading column axis... The column axis is read and the members are migrated (or not if not recognized). Valid members are migrated. For each member that is not migrated, a text is displayed within this step. Start reading EvDRE options... Options are migrated. For each option migrated, a text is displayed within this step. The EvDRE migration for the sheet [SheetName] is done. Indicate that the migration of the sheet has been performed. After Migration Below you can see a migrated report. Figure 178: Migrated EvDRE 284 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates If you have migrated the active worksheet or workbook (using the Active Worksheet or Active Workbook option) and you are not satisfied with the migration: Close your file without saving it. Open it again, make your modifications and launch the migration again. If you have migrated all the workbooks contained in a specified folder (using the Planning and Consolidation Server or Local option) and you are not satisfied with the migration of one or more files: Delete the migrated workbook(s). Make a copy of the original workbook(s). Rename the worbook(s), deleting the prefix #Copy of Original# (to be able to launch a migration again). Make your modifications and launch the migration again. If you are satisfied with the migration, perform the following actions: • • • • • • 2011 If cells appear in magenta, indicating unrecognized members, be sure that you do not want to use these members anymore. For more information on unrecognized members, see RowKeyRange and ColKeyRange Members and PageKeyRange Members Once you are sure that you want to validate the migration process, perform a refresh: row and columns containing cells in magenta are deleted. If cells appear in yellow, indicating EPM functions, move the EPM functions to other cells in the sheet and do not delete them. Always leave a blank row or column between a function and a report. Also, it is recommended that you move the function above all the reports. You can then delete all the ranges that are linked to the EvDRE and that are not used by the EPM add-in. Do not delete the cells containing formula beginning with =EPMOlapMember( or =EPMOlapMultiMember( or =EPMInsertedMember(. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 285
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in 286 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 BPC430 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates Exercise 11: Migrating EvDRE Templates Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use an existing EvDRE template. • Migrate an EvDRE template into an EPM Report. Business Example Your client needs to use some existing EvDRE templates in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. They also need to begin migrating the existing templates as time permits. Task 1: Go to the EPM Excel Interface for the Sales model. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 2. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Category ACTUAL - Actual from GL Entity CONSTORE_TYPE - Store Type Consolidation Product CON_PET_TYPE - Pet Type Consolidation P_Acct CE0001000 - Total Costs RPTCurrency LC - Local Currency Time 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Measures 3. Member ID - Description PERIODIC - Periodic Open the 7.5 EvDRE Formatted Template from the 7.5 EvDREs folder. Task 2: Migrate an existing EvDRE template. 1. 2. Open the Log. 3. 2011 Migrate the 7.5 EvDRE Nested Rows template from the 7.5 EvDREs folder. Open the migrated 7.5 EvDRE Nested Rows template from the 7.5 EvDRE folder. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 287
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Solution 11: Migrating EvDRE Templates Task 1: Go to the EPM Excel Interface for the Sales model. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) On the Web Client Start Page, select EPM Office Add-in Excel The EPM - Connection Manager opens after a few seconds. b) Select the Sales - BPC430_## connection. c) Choose OK. The EPM Pane appears on the right. 2. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description Category ACTUAL - Actual from GL Entity CONSTORE_TYPE - Store Type Consolidation Product CON_PET_TYPE - Pet Type Consolidation P_Acct CE0001000 - Total Costs RPTCurrency LC - Local Currency Time 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Measures PERIODIC - Periodic a) 3. Set your context selections as shown above Open the 7.5 EvDRE Formatted Template from the 7.5 EvDREs folder. a) In the EPM tab, choose Open → Open Server Root Folder → Reports → 7.5 EvDREs → Formatted Template → Open b) Choose Refresh The system recognizes the EvDRE template and makes the Expand button available. c) Choose Expand Continued on next page 288 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates Figure 179: An Unmigrated EvDRE Template d) Choose Options → Workbook Options. Figure 180: EvDRE Workbook Options These are the settings you can use for EvDRE templates in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. e) Choose OK. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 289
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in f) BPC430 Close the workbook without saving it. Task 2: Migrate an existing EvDRE template. 1. Migrate the 7.5 EvDRE Nested Rows template from the 7.5 EvDREs folder. a) In the EPM tab, choose More → EvDRE Migration ... The EPM - EvDRE Migration dialogue opens. b) Select Planning and Consolidation Server. Next to Server Folder, select the Ellipse icon. The open folder dialogue opens in display mode. c) Choose TEMPLATELIBRARY → REPORTS → 7.5 EvDREs. → Open. d) Choose OK. The EvDRE is migrated and a message appears saying that The migration process has ended. The system also creates a copy of the original template. e) 2. Choose OK. Open the Log. a) Choose More → Log. The EPM - Log is displayed. Note: You should see several warnings for members that are no longer valid, such as CONUS. Invalid members will appear with a magenta pattern. At the bottom of the log you can see the location. b) Choose OK. Continued on next page 290 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Migrating EvDRE Templates 3. Open the migrated 7.5 EvDRE Nested Rows template from the 7.5 EvDRE folder. a) In the EPM tab, choose Open → Open Server Root Folder → Reports → 7.5 EvDREs. You can see the migrated as well as copies of the original templates. b) Choose Nested Rows → Open. Figure 181: A Migrated EvDRE Template c) Choose Refresh The system refreshes the new EPM Report and removes the invalid members in magenta. d) 2011 Close the template without saving it. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 291
    • Unit 2: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in BPC430 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Migrate EvDRE templates. 292 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit Summary BPC430
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • Unit Summary 295 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit Summary 296 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit 3 Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions Unit Overview This unit covers Distribution and Collection, Comments, and the Planning Tools; Spread, Trend, and Weight. Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • Distribute static reports to file directories Distribute static reports via e-mail Collect off line data Describe the features of comments Save comments with the EPMSaveComment function Save comments with the ribbon command Report on comments Evaluate the features of spread, trend, and weight to see if they will meet some of your business requirements. Unit Contents Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard ......................... 298 Procedure: How to Set Up and Use Distribution and Collection ......... 301 Exercise 12: Use the Distribution and Collection Wizard ................. 311 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature ........................................... 330 Procedure: How to Look Up Comment Data for Troubleshooting Purposes......................................................................... 341 Exercise 13: Configuring Comments ........................................ 343 Lesson: Using the Spread, Trend, and Weight Manual Planning Functions 359 Exercise 14: Spread, Trend, And Weight ................................... 361 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 297
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will use the distribution and collection wizard to distribute templates and also to collect planning data. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • Distribute static reports to file directories Distribute static reports via e-mail Collect off line data Business Example Your management team wants to have their cash flow and profit and loss statements e-mailed to them every night. Also, you have a large of number of planners working offline and you need to use the collection wizard to store their data in the model. Overview You can make static workbooks (containing reports or input forms) available to a set of users. The workbooks can be stored on a share file, for example, or they can be sent by e-mail to the recipients you have specified in the template. • • • Excel templates can be distributed to Microsoft Office Outlook e-mail addresses Excel templates can be distributed to network folders You can also collect data from offline templates send it to the database Below, you can see the Distribution options in the EPM Ribbon. 298 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Figure 182: Distribution Options in the EPM Ribbon The options above are defined as follows: • • • • • • Distribute - Start the distribution wizard Collect - Start the collection wizard New / Open Template - Create a new or open an existing template Save / Save As - Save or Copy a template Validate - Validate the referenced workbook Change Connection - A template is created by default on the first connection used in the workbook. Use this option to select a different connection. A template can only apply to workbooks using the same connection. In the figure below, you can see the components and the data flow. The following procedure explains the steps in the figure. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 299
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 183: Planning: Distribution & Collection Wizard Concept 300 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard How to Set Up and Use Distribution and Collection 1. Create a template to use as the Input Schedule. 2. Save it to the PDBOOKS folder for example. Caution: Close the workbook. 3. Create a new distribution template. • Enter the naming and select the workbook. • – Enter a Template Name – Enter a Section Name – Select the Workbook – Enter a Workbook Description Dimension Member Selection • – Select the fixed dimensions – Select the variable dimensions Variable Members • – Select the variable dimension members – Enter a user name for each variable dimension member Save the template Caution: Close the template 4. Run the distribution wizard • • Choose Distribution → Distribute Now. Select Switch to offline mode and save to folder Note: The workbooks are automatically switched to offline, meaning that the users will be able to work with a workbook in a disconnected state without using the EPM add-in. • • • Select the folder location Select the Template and Section View the log The template has been distributed to an intranet folder or share drive. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 301
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 5. Have the offline users save data to the workbooks. 6. BPC430 Run the collection wizard. • • • • • Choose Distribution → Collect Select Local Folder Select the folder location Select the Workbooks View the log The offline data has been saved to the data base Excel template Below you can see a sample input schedule. This same template will be used for each of the variable members. Figure 184: A Sample Template Note: Any dimension that is not in the rows or columns should be placed in the page axis. Only the first sheet is published. Distribution Template Before distributing workbooks, you must create a distribution template. The template specifies the information you want to include in the workbooks, including selection of dimension members and users. When creating a new template, the EPM - Distribution Template dialog pops up. 302 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Figure 185: Template Name Note: Not all of the fields in the template are shown above. The options in the distribution template are defined as follows: Distribution Template Options Option Definition Template Name This is the distribution template workbook name Section Name Name of the section Add New Section, Duplicate Section, Delete Section Use these options to maintain sections Report Workbook Select your workbook Workbook Description Enter a description that is different than the section name. This will be the name of a generated sub-folder Variable Time Can be used to determine time for all sections Select Dimensions Use this option to open a dialogue box to select fixed and variable dimensions Fixed Dimensions Dimensions with single values Variable Dimensions Dimensions with multiple values Save the template to a This will save the template to another folder different location Note: Do not use the following characters: /:*?“”<>|&+=()[]{}$%. Do not use a space before or after the names. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 303
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Caution: A section name and a workbook description must be unique within a template A template can include one or several sections. Each section includes the selection of the fixed and variable dimension members. When launching the distribution, you will be able to select the section(s) of the template you want to distribute. You can create a blank section or a section based on existing one. You can also delete a section from the template. These actions are available in the template dialog box, under the section tab. When Select Dimensions is chosen the Dimension Selector opens. Any dimension whose members not specified in the rows and columns of the input schedule should be assigned as either Fixed Members or Variable Members. Figure 186: Dimension Selection One workbook will be created for each variable member selected. Report axis dimensions with single values should be selected as fixed members in the publication template. Report axis dimensions with multiple values should be selected as variable members in the publication template. A user must be assigned to each variable member regardless of whether you are distributing to folders or e-mail. 304 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Figure 187: Fixed and Variable Selections Note: A dimension can only be fixed or variable, not both. In the result set, the members are displayed according to the following precedence: 1. 2. 3. 4. Members in the row and column axis Members selected as fixed or variable Members in the page axis Members in the context The Excel template below is generated when the distribution template is saved. This inherits all of the settings from the EPM - Distribution Template screens except for two: 1. 2. 2011 !CLEARBOOK - Use this to Accumulate, Replace, or use the equivalent setting by section - !CLEARSECTION when a template is distributed multiple times Suppressed Dimension Members - Use to exclude dimension members if they have zero value © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 305
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 188: Generated Template The Distribution Wizard To distribute the workbooks, the Distribution Wizard is used. Here, you select the Output type and Folder Location. Figure 189: Folder Location Then, the template and section is selected. Note: When the template is chosen, the system will validate it and during that process, the administrator will see the distribution template being opened, validated, and then closed. After that, the section can then be selected. 306 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Figure 190: Select Template and Section After distribution, the log is available for review. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 307
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 191: Process Log When the administrator chooses Distribution → Collect the EPM - Collection Wizard is opened. Either the Outlook Mailbox or Local Folder is selected and then the folder is selected. The files in that location will then be available for collection. Note: The Reload option is used to read any last minute changes to e-mail addresses. 308 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Figure 192: Collection - Select File E-mail options If you want to send the workbooks by e-mail, you must enter the required information about the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol ) server you use to send the e-mails in EPM tab Options → User Options. Enter the following information in the SMTP Server Configuration area of the User Options dialog box: • • • The SMTP server address The port number - As a general rule, the port number is 25 Select the authentication type: Anonymous - If you select this type, no authentication is required and you do not need to enter the information in the Authentication area. – Basic or NTML (authentication protocol) - If you have selected the basic or the NTML authentication type, you must enter the login and password of the SMTP server Enable SSL - Select the option if needed. – • When you distribute via e-mail, the following screen appears: 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 309
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 193: Distribute by E-mail After the workbooks are e-mailed as attachments, the users will then enter data in the distributed workbooks and e-mail them back. To collect data entered in workbooks that users have sent by e-mail, select the Outlook Mailbox option in the EPM - Collection Wizard. Then click the ellipsis button in the Working Folder area. In the Microsoft Outlook dialog box, select the Outlook folder in which the e-mails with the workbooks are stored. Select the e-mails containing workbooks that you want to collect and click Next twice. Security There are three task profiles for this feature. 1. 2. 3. 310 Edit Book and Distribution Templates - This permits a user maintain the templates Use Offline Distribution - This permits a user to execute the Distribution Wizard Use Offline Collection - This permits a user to execute the Collection Wizard © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Exercise 12: Use the Distribution and Collection Wizard Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and save an input schedule to be distributed. • Create a new distribution list. • Distribute and then collect the data using the wizard. Business Example You have some users who have not been trained to use Planning and Consolidation, and they will therefore work offline. After they have updated their excel templates and saved them to an offline directory, use the wizard to collect the data. Task 1: Prepare an input schedule to use as the form to be distributed for Consulting and Manufacturing. Use the BPC430_## Environment and the Expense Model. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 2. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description P_Account PL400 -Indirect Expenses P_Category Plan - Plan P_Cost TOTAL - Total P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2013.TOTAL - 2013 Total Measures PERIODIC - Periodic 3. In the Expense Model, use drag and drop to build a report with P_Account in the rows and P_Time in the columns to create the input form. 4. Display the P_Account base members for Indirect Expenses in the rows. 5. Display the months for 2013 in the columns Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 311
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 6. Place P_Category, P_Cost, P_Curr, and Measures in the Page Axis. 7. Save the template as Student_Schedule. Task 2: Create the distribution template. 1. Open a blank workbook. 2. Create your distribution settings as shown below: Figure 194: Template Name 3. Select your dimensions as you see below. Figure 195: Dimension Selection 4. Make your fixed and variable member selections as you see below: Continued on next page 312 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Figure 196: Variable Selections Task 3: Run the distribution wizard. 1. Distribute the template. 2. Select the folder option. 3. Select your template and section. 4. Review the summary log. 5. Review the process log. 6. Finish the process and close Excel. Task 4: Enter data offline. 1. Open the files via Microsoft Office Excel 2007 and enter 100 for Consulting and 200 for Manufacturing. 2. Enter data for Manufacturing Task 5: Run the collection wizard. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 2. Ensure you are on the EXPENSE - BPC430_## connection. 3. On the EPM tab, open the collection wizard and select the working folder. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 313
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 4. Select the file location. 5. Select both files. 6. Review the process log. 7. BPC430 Complete the process. Task 6: Confirm that the data is in the data base. 1. 2. 314 Use the Student_Schedule to verify that your data was saved to the data base. View the Manufacturing data. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Solution 12: Use the Distribution and Collection Wizard Task 1: Prepare an input schedule to use as the form to be distributed for Consulting and Manufacturing. Use the BPC430_## Environment and the Expense Model. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) In the Web Client Start Page select EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager opens after a few seconds. b) Select the Expense - BPC430_## connection. c) Choose OK The EPM Pane appears on the right. d) 2. Choose the EPM tab. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description P_Account PL400 -Indirect Expenses P_Category Plan - Plan P_Cost TOTAL - Total P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2013.TOTAL - 2013 Total Measures PERIODIC - Periodic a) Set your context selections as shown in the table. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 315
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 3. BPC430 In the Expense Model, use drag and drop to build a report with P_Account in the rows and P_Time in the columns to create the input form. a) On the EPM tab, choose Options → Sheet Options. b) Select Use as Input Form. c) Choose OK. d) From the EPM Pane, drag the dimensions to the cells specified below. Dimension Cell P_Account A5 P_Time B4 The Report is executed. 4. Display the P_Account base members for Indirect Expenses in the rows. a) On the lower right in the Row Axis, click on P_Account (in blue hypertext). The EPM-Member Selector opens. b) Select Indirect Expenses (Under Net Income → Operating Income) by placing a checkbox to the left of the member. c) Under Selection Relationship choose Base Level. d) Click the right arrow button to move the selection to Selected Members. e) Similarly, click the left arrow button to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. f) Choose OK. Continued on next page 316 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard 5. Display the months for 2013 in the columns a) On the lower right in the Column Axis, click on P_Time (in blue hypertext). The EPM-Member Selector opens. b) c) Under Selection Relationship choose Base Level. d) Click the right arrow button to move the selection to Selected Members. e) Similarly, click the left arrow button to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. f) 6. Select 2013.TOTAL (It may say 2013) by placing a checkbox to the left of the member. Choose OK. Place P_Category, P_Cost, P_Curr, and Measures in the Page Axis. a) Choose Edit Report. b) Drag P_Category, P_Cost, P_Curr, and Measures to the Page Axis. c) Select OK. Your worksheet should appear as follows: Figure 197: Input Sheet Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 317
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 7. BPC430 Save the template as Student_Schedule. a) Choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. b) Choose Company(Public) → PDBOOKS. c) In the File Name field, enter: Student_Schedule. d) Choose Save. e) Choose the Office Button and Select Close . Task 2: Create the distribution template. 1. Open a blank workbook. a) b) 2. Choose the Office Button. Choose New → Create. Create your distribution settings as shown below: Figure 198: Template Name a) Choose Distribution → New Template b) Next to Template Name*, enter Student_Distribution c) Next to Section Name*, enter Section1 d) Next to Report Workbook*, select Student_Schedule by choosing the Ellipsis button. The Open window appears. Choose Company(Public) → PDBooks → Sutdent_Schedule then choose Open e) 3. Next to Workbook Description*, enter Student_Schedule. Select your dimensions as you see below. Continued on next page 318 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Figure 199: Dimension Selection a) b) Make your selections as you see above by selecting the checkbox in the appropriate dimensions and then selecting Add c) 4. Choose the Select Dimensions hyperlink in the middle right of the window. After you have made both the Fixed Member and Variable Member selections, choose OK Make your fixed and variable member selections as you see below: Figure 200: Variable Selections a) Select your Fixed Member assignments as shown above. b) Next to User enter your use id: BPC-## . Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 319
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions c) BPC430 Next to P_COST choose the ellipse icon. The EPM - Member Selector opens. d) Select Consulting (UnderTotal → Direct) by placing a checkbox to the left of the member. e) Under Selection Relationship choose Member Only f) Click the right arrow button to move the selection to Selected Members g) Similarly, click the left arrow button to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. h) Choose OK You may receive a message Some members have been modified so that the template can be used, choose OK. i) Choose the green plus sign (lower right). A new row appears. j) In the new row, enter your use ID: BPC-## k) Next to P_COST choose the ellipsis icon. The EPM - Member Selector opens. l) Select Manufacturing (UnderTotal → Direct) by placing a checkbox to the left of the member. m) Under Selection Relationship choose Member Only. n) Click the right arrow button to move the selection to Selected Members. o) Similarly, click the left arrow button to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. p) Choose OK. You may receive a message Some members have been modified so that the template can be used, choose OK. Hint: To save the template in the next step, you may need to maximize your screen. q) Choose Save The excel sheet is generated and a save dialogue box pops up. Continued on next page 320 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard r) Enter Student_Distribution in the File Name. s) Choose Save. An error may occur. If so, choose OK. The workbook below will be saved, but it will close and you will not see it. Figure 201: Generated Template Task 3: Run the distribution wizard. 1. Distribute the template. a) Choose Distribution → Distribute. b) Select Distribute Now→ then choose Next. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 321
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 2. BPC430 Select the folder option. a) Select Switch to offline mode and save to folder. b) Next to Folder Location choose the Ellipsis button then My Documents → PC_NW → train-## → Books → BPC430_## → EXPENSE → WebExcel → highlight ManageDistributionList → then choose OK. Figure 202: Folder Location Continued on next page 322 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard 3. Select your template and section. a) Choose Next → Select Student_Distribution The template will validate for a few seconds. b) When the template is finished validating, select Section1. Figure 203: Select Template and Then Section 4. Review the summary log. a) Choose Next. After a few seconds, you will see a summary log that lists both Consulting and Manufacturing for your user ID. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 323
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 5. BPC430 Review the process log. a) Choose Next. The process log appears in a few seconds: Figure 204: Process Log 6. Finish the process and close Excel. a) Choose Finish. b) Close the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in by choosing the Office button → Exit Excel. Continued on next page 324 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Task 4: Enter data offline. 1. Open the files via Microsoft Office Excel 2007 and enter 100 for Consulting and 200 for Manufacturing. a) Open Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Start → Program → Microsoft Office → Microsoft Excel. b) Choose the Office Button → Open → My Documents → PC_NW → train-## → Books → BPC430_## → EXPENSE → WebExcel → ManageDistributionList → BPC-## → Student_Schedule → Consulting → Open. c) Enter 100 for Personnel Cost in 13 - Jan → Choose Office Button → Save. The data is saved in native excel. 2. Enter data for Manufacturing a) Open the Manufacturing workbook Office Button → Open b) Enter 200 for Personnel Cost in 13 - Jan → Choose Save The data is saved in native excel. c) Close the two spreadsheets by choosing Office → Close. Task 5: Run the collection wizard. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) On the Web Client Start Page, select EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager opens after a few seconds. b) Select the Expense - BPC430_## connection. c) Choose OK. The EPM Pane appears on the right. d) 2. Choose the EPM tab. Ensure you are on the EXPENSE - BPC430_## connection. a) From the EPM ribbon, choose Open → Change Connection If the EXPENSE - BPC430_## connection is not chosen, choose it. Choose OK. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 325
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 3. BPC430 On the EPM tab, open the collection wizard and select the working folder. a) Choose the EPM tab → Distribution → Collect... The EPM - Collection Wizard opens. b) 4. Select Local Folder. Select the file location. a) Next to Folder select the ellipse button → My Documents → PC_NW → train-## → Books → BPC430_## → Expense → WebExcel → ManageDistributionList → BPC-## → highlight Student_Schedule → then choose OK The Consulting and Manufacturing workbooks appear. 5. Select both files. a) Choose Select All Figure 205: Collection - Select File Choose Next. A log is created: The following files will be processed and the CONSULTING and MANUFACTURING workbooks are listed. Continued on next page 326 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard 6. Review the process log. a) Choose Next. Figure 206: Collection Process Completed Hint: You may be able to hover over line 3 above to see a more detailed log including the Accepted Count 1. As of SP6, this did not work. After a few seconds, the processing is complete. 7. Complete the process. a) Choose Finish. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 327
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Task 6: Confirm that the data is in the data base. 1. Use the Student_Schedule to verify that your data was saved to the data base. a) From the EPM ribbon choose Open → Open Server Root Folder. b) Choose Company(Public) → PDBooks. c) Select Student_Schedule → Open. d) Set your P_COST context to Consulting. e) Choose Refresh. You should see 100 appear for 2013.01. 2. View the Manufacturing data. a) Set your P_COST context to Manufacturing. b) Choose Refresh. You should see 200 appear for 2013.01. c) 328 Close the template. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Distribution and Collection Wizard Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Distribute static reports to file directories • Distribute static reports via e-mail • Collect off line data 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 329
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will use the commenting feature from the menu and also with the EPMSaveComment function. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • Describe the features of comments Save comments with the EPMSaveComment function Save comments with the ribbon command Report on comments Business Example Your planners need to record planning assumptions and explaining variances in the database and so they are interested in the comment feature. Business Scenarios for Using Comments Here are a few ways of how you can use comments: • • Use the EPMSaveComment function Use the Add Comment ribbon command Prerequisites To use comments, the Enable Comments must be turned on by model. This is done in administration. 330 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Figure 207: Turning on Comments Note: In the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, version for Microsoft Platform, Models are comment enabled when their web parameter COMMENT is set to ON. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 331
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 There are two task profiles for comments: 1. 2. Administer Comments - add, modify, and remove comments for all users Edit Comments - add, modify, and remove only your own comments The EPM Functions for Comments There are three comment functions in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in: • • • EPMSaveComment - Used to save comments EPMCommentPartialContext - Retrieves all comments associated with a set of dimension members that is partially defined. Any members not specified in the function are ignored. EPMCommentFullContext - Retrieves all comments associated with a set of dimension members that is fully defined. If there is no member specified for a dimension, its context member is used instead. The EPMSaveComment function can be used to send comments from a column in excel for example to the data base. The function has the following selections: Figure 208: EPMSaveComment Function 332 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature EPMSaveComment Selections Field Definition Cell The cell where the comment is retrieved or entered Connection Name Specify the connection you want to use or if left blank, the active connection is used Member1 The cell for the row member for example Member2 The cell for the column member for example Note: Any dimensions not included in the function will be inherited from the dimension's context and therefore every dimension will have assigned a member to the comment. Also, the keyword will be blank and the priority will be NONE. After setting up the function, comments can be sent to the data base and displayed in a template: Figure 209: Comments in a Separate Column In the example above, the user inputs comments into column F. The function is located in column G. Note: Comments can be recorded for either base level or parent members. In the example above, the comment is for a parent member 2011.Q1. Sending Comments via the Ribbon Command Comments can also be sent from the EPM Ribbon. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 333
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 210: Ribbon Commands When Adding Comments you assign the Priority, the Comment, and a Keyword in the Basic Information. Note: The Comment can be approximately 250 characters long. Figure 211: Sending Comments - Basic Information The assignment of the dimension members can be based on the Active Cell, Active Context, or a Custom Context. If you select the Custom Context, then you can select members independently from the context. If you select NONE the system will store [ALL] in the data base. 334 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Figure 212: Sending Comments - Context Using the Add Comment, option will also write comments to the data base, however not all dimension members need to be assigned. Reporting on Comments There are two ways to report on comments: 1. 2. From the EPM Ribbon via Find Comments From the web client Audit section via the link Comments When reporting from the EPM Ribbon, the user selects Find Comments and is presented with the following selection screen: 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 335
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 213: Selection Criteria for Finding Comments The selections above are fairly easy to use. However, it is important to note that when using a value of ALL, it will return a comment on any dimension member and if it was recorded via NONE via Add Comments. That also means that you can run a wide open search. When you choose Find, you will see a report like the one below: 336 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Figure 214: Manage Comments There are important options in the menu bar: 1. 2. 3. Edit - select a comment to change it Delete - select a comment to delete it View History - select a comment to view that comment and prior comments on that data intersection. Note: You can also add more comments for the same data intersection. 4. 5. 6. 7. Edit Criteria - select to change the data selections Column Selector - select to suppress columns Switch Columns - drag and drop columns in a different order Sorting - click on a column header to sort it As an administrator, you can also report on comments from the Home tab Audit section. When you choose Comments, a tab called Audit - Comments is generated with these prompts: 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 337
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 215: Audit - Comment Report Criteria The selections are like the ones for Find Comments except you need to select a model. You can also choose to see Only the Most Recent Comments or the Full History of Comments for a data intersection. When you choose Display Report you will see output like this: 338 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Figure 216: Audit - Comment Report Hint: You can search by clicking a column header and choosing Toggle Search. Hint: You can view the dimension members in a dialogue box via Show Full Context. Where Comments are Stored Comments are stored in a separate table from the transaction data on the BW Application Server. Comments generated from either the EPM Ribbon Add Comments option or EPMSaveComment are all stored in tables by model. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 339
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 217: Planning: Submitting Comments Architecture Note: Comments are stored in tables at the sequel layer in the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, version for Microsoft Platform. 340 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature How to Look Up Comment Data for Troubleshooting Purposes 1. In BW, go to RSA1 and look up your Environment and Model prefixes. 2. Go to SE16 and enter a table name of: /CPMB/EPMPCMT where EP in the 7th and 8th position is the Environment prefix and MLP in the 9-11th positions is the Model prefix. 3. Choose Enter. 4. Choose F8. You can see the detailed data from the data base. Data Manager Packages for Comments To support mass data management of comments, two data manager packages are provided: • • 2011 Clear Comments - used to delete comment tables Copy Comments - used to copy comments across dimensions © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 341
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 342 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 BPC430 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Exercise 13: Configuring Comments Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Work with the comment functions • Use the ribbon to add comments • Use the ribbon to find comments • Use audit to report on comments Business Example As business users input planning data, they would like to record a brief commentary to capture their assumptions. Task 1: Configure the EPMSaveComment function to save comments to the data base. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 2. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description P_Account PL310 -Personnel Cost P_Category FORECAST - Forecast P_Cost TOTAL - Total P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2011.Q1 - 2011 Q1 Measures PERIODIC - Periodic 3. In the Expense Model, use drag and drop to build an input form with P_COST in the rows and P_TIME in the columns. 4. Display all of the P_COST base members in the rows. 5. Display the months and then 2011.Q1 in the columns. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 343
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 6. BPC430 Enter and save the data as shown below: Hint: Enter January data and then use excel formulas to increase the vaules by 3% for most of the cost centers. Use 6% for ADMIN and 10% for SALES. Figure 218: Data 7. 8. 9. Label columns F and G as Comments and To Be Hidden. Comments and To Be Hidden. Enter comments as shown below: Continued on next page 344 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Figure 219: Comments 10. Save the template as GR## Column Comments. 11. Run the Find Comments from the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. Task 2: Adding Comments from the EPM Ribbon in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Use the EPM Ribbon to add comments and then run the comments report from administration. 1. Add a comment via the EPM ribbon Add Comment option as you see below: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 345
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 220: Sending Comments - Basic Information Figure 221: Sending Comments - Context 2. Run the audit comment report for the following selections: Continued on next page 346 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Figure 222: Audit Criteria 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 347
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Solution 13: Configuring Comments Task 1: Configure the EPMSaveComment function to save comments to the data base. 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) On the Web Client Start Page, select EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager opens after a few seconds. b) Select the Expense - BPC430_## connection. c) Choose OK. The EPM Pane appears on the right. 2. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description P_Account PL310 -Personnel Cost P_Category FORECAST - Forecast P_Cost TOTAL - Total P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2011.Q1 - 2011 Q1 Measures PERIODIC - Periodic a) 3. Set your context selections as shown in the table. In the Expense Model, use drag and drop to build an input form with P_COST in the rows and P_TIME in the columns. a) In the EPM tab, choose Options → Sheet Options. b) Select Use as Input Form. c) From the EPM Pane drag the dimensions to the cells specified below. Dimension Cell P_Cost A4 P_Time B3 Continued on next page 348 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature 4. Display all of the P_COST base members in the rows. a) b) Under Selection Relationship choose Base Level. c) Click the right arrow button to move the selection to Selected Members. d) Similarly, click the left arrow button to remove the prior selection. e) 5. On the lower right, in the Row Axis, click on P_COST (in blue hypertext). Choose OK. Display the months and then 2011.Q1 in the columns. a) On the lower right in the Column Axis, click on P_TIME (in blue hypertext). b) Select 2011.Q1 by placing a checkbox to the left of the member. c) Under Selection Relationship choose Member and Children. d) Click the right arrow button to move the selection to Selected Members. e) Similarly, click the left arrow button to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. f) Choose OK. Your worksheet should appear as follows: Figure 223: Input Sheet Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 349
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 6. BPC430 Enter and save the data as shown below: Hint: Enter January data and then use excel formulas to increase the vaules by 3% for most of the cost centers. Use 6% for ADMIN and 10% for SALES. Figure 224: Data a) Enter the data as shown above. b) Click Save Data → Save Worksheet Data. c) To send the data, choose Yes. The Save Results dialog box is displayed. d) e) 7. Choose OK . Choose Refresh from the EPM ribbon. Label columns F and G as Comments and To Be Hidden. a) In cell F3 enter Comments. b) In cell G3 enter To Be Hidden. Continued on next page 350 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature 8. Comments and To Be Hidden. a) From Excel, choose the Formulas tab. b) In cell G4, choose the Excel Insert Function button. c) Next to Or select a category select EPMFunctions. d) Under Select a Function double click EPMSaveComment. e) Fill in the parameters as shown below: Figure 225: EPMSaveComment Function f) Choose OK. g) Copy from G4 to G5:12. The function cells display #RFR which means a refresh is in order. 9. Enter comments as shown below: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 351
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 226: Comments a) Enter comments as shown above. b) Click Save Data → Save Worksheet Data. You receive a message that 9 comments will be sent. Do you want to continue? c) To send the comments, choose Yes. The Save Results dialog box is displayed. Your comments are now stored in the data base. 10. Save the template as GR## Column Comments. a) Choose the EPM tab, then choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. b) Choose Company(Public) → Input Schedules. c) In the File Name field enter: GR## Column Comments. d) Choose Save. 11. Run the Find Comments from the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) Choose Comments → Find Comments. b) Select Custom Context. c) Make your selections as you see below: Continued on next page 352 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Figure 227: Finding Comments d) Choose Find. Your report is displayed in the web client in a tab called Manage Comments. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 353
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Figure 228: Manage Comments e) Close the tab. Task 2: Adding Comments from the EPM Ribbon in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Use the EPM Ribbon to add comments and then run the comments report from administration. 1. Add a comment via the EPM ribbon Add Comment option as you see below: Figure 229: Sending Comments - Basic Information Continued on next page 354 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Figure 230: Sending Comments - Context a) On the EPM Tab, choose Comments → Add Comment. b) Add the data as shown above. c) Choose Save. The Save Results dialog appears d) 2. Choose OK. Run the audit comment report for the following selections: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 355
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Continued on next page 356 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Comment Feature Figure 231: Audit Criteria a) In the Web Client, on the Home tab, choose Audit. b) Under General choose Comments. A tab called Audit - Comments appears. c) Next to Model select EXPENSE. d) Leave the other criteria unchanged. e) Choose Display Report. Figure 232: Audit Results Your results are displayed with the associated Dimension Members. f) 2011 Close the tab. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 357
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the features of comments • Save comments with the EPMSaveComment function • Save comments with the ribbon command • Report on comments 358 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Spread, Trend, and Weight Manual Planning Functions Lesson: Using the Spread, Trend, and Weight Manual Planning Functions Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn how to set up spread, trend, and weight. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • Evaluate the features of spread, trend, and weight to see if they will meet some of your business requirements. Business Example Planners will occasionally have a need to easily manipulate their data in excel. The spread, trend, and weight modeling options are built in functions in the EPM add-in that you can use without any configuration or programming. They can be accessed from the EPM Ribbon under Planning. Spread The spread feature enables you to take a value and allocate it among selected destination cells. The allocation can be equally or weighted by some range of values. For example, you can take the value 100 and spread it across a number of columns that represent each month of the year. Spread Field Source Value Specifies the total to be spread Destination Where the system writes the result of the spread Weights Optional: A range containing weight values upon which to base the spread Spread Results 2011 Purpose Add to existing values or Overwrite existing values © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 359
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Trend The trend feature allows you to take a value or a percentage and grow it by a factor among selected cells. This function places the source value in the first cell of the destination range. Each subsequent cell in the destination increases by the amount or percentage specified. Trend Field Purpose Source Value Specifies the initial value from which the trend begins Trend types Percentage or Value; Increase or Decrease Destination Where the system writes the result of the trend Trend Result Overwrite existing values or Add to existing values Weight The weight feature allows you to allocate a set of values based on weighted factors in your spreadsheet. It allows you to take a set of values, grow them if desired, and then allocate the new amount based on the relative weights of the selected cells. The destination range is the same as the weight range. Weight Field Purpose Sum to Allocate Specifies the value to allocate Increase Value to Allocate Destination 360 Increase of the overall sum to allocate. Can be by percentage, value, or none Cells containing the relative weights and where the system writes the result of the weight © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Spread, Trend, and Weight Manual Planning Functions Exercise 14: Spread, Trend, And Weight Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the Spread Trend and Weight features to help you plan. Business Example You want to generate your planning data set using the spread, trend, and weight features available in the EPM add-in. Task 1: In this exercise, you will use the spread feature available for your input form within the EPM add-in. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. 2. Create a new blank workbook. 3. Set your EPM Context. 4. Create a report with the Product dimension in the Row Axis and Time in the Column Axis. For the Product dimension, set the members to All Dog Products, member and children. For the Time dimension, set the member to 2012 Base level only. 5. Set your report to an input form. 6. Using a base value of 100 in January, use the spread feature to perform an equal distribution of values into January, February, and March. 7. In this next scenario, we want to use the weights feature to do our spread. For the product Ball with Cotton Ropes, spread 100 to January, February, and March, based on a 2, 3, 4 weighting factor. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 361
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 Task 2: In this exercise, you will use the trend feature available for your input form within the EPM add-in. 1. Using a base value of 500 in January, use the trend feature to distribute the values for January, February, and March by using the % feature in both overwrite mode. Task 3: In this exercise, you will use the weight feature available for your input form within the EPM add-in. 1. Using the base values you just created in the trend task, use the weight feature to add an additional 300 of sales for January, February, and March for the Natural Canned Food. Task 4: Use Spread, Trend, and Weight together Use all three function without the step by step instructions to develop the following result set: Figure 233: Using spread, trend, and weight 1. 2. 362 Clear all existing data by highlighting all data, and calling the Excel Context Menu and choosing Clear Contents. Starting with a value of 200 for DOGACTIVECAN. in January 2012, use the three features to derive the data set above. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Spread, Trend, and Weight Manual Planning Functions Solution 14: Spread, Trend, And Weight Task 1: In this exercise, you will use the spread feature available for your input form within the EPM add-in. 1. Go to the Excel client for your Sales model in your BPC430_## environment. Note: If you do not have a connection for the Sales model use the instructions in Exercise #2 to create it. a) From your web client's Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel. Excel opens and the EPM - Connection Manager appears. b) Choose the Sales - BPC430_## connection. c) Click OK. d) If you are prompted, log on again with your user ID and password as shown below: User ID BPC-## 2. Password training Create a new blank workbook. a) Create a blank workbook by choosing the Office button and choose New. b) Choose Create. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 363
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 3. BPC430 Set your EPM Context. a) Set your EPM Context to the following: Dimension Member ID - Description CATEGORY FLASH - Current Flash ENTITY STORE1 - Store1 PRODUCT DOG - All Dog Products P_ACCT EXTSALES - External Sales RPTCURRENCY LC - Local Currency TIME 2012.TOTAL - 2012 MEASURES PERIODIC - Periodic Note: You may have to scroll down to see all of your dimensions. Continued on next page 364 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Spread, Trend, and Weight Manual Planning Functions 4. Create a report with the Product dimension in the Row Axis and Time in the Column Axis. For the Product dimension, set the members to All Dog Products, member and children. For the Time dimension, set the member to 2012 Base level only. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose New Report. The EPM - Report Editor window opens on the Layout tab by default. b) Right-click the Product dimension and select Move to Row Axis. c) Right-click Time dimension and select Move to Column Axis. d) In the Column Axis, open the EPM - Member Selector by clicking on the Time dimension. The EPM - Member Selector window opens. e) Move the Selected Members Context 2012.TOTAL - 2012, with the Relationship Member and Children to the left. f) Choose 2012.TOTAL - 2012 by placing a checkbox to the left of the member. On the bottom left, set your Selection Relationship to Base Level. Move this selection to the right under Selected Members by using the arrow. g) Choose OK to close the EPM - Member Selector. h) In the Row Axis, open the EPM - Member Selector by clicking on the Product dimension. The EPM - Member Selector window opens. i) Set the Member Names to Display ID j) Choose OK to close the EPM - Member Selector. k) Choose OK to close the EPM - Report Editor. The Report is executed. 5. Set your report to an input form. a) From the EPM Ribbon, go to Options → Sheet Options. The EPM - Sheet Options window opens. b) On the General tab, under Data Input select the checkbox next to Use as Input Form. c) Choose OK. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 365
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions 6. BPC430 Using a base value of 100 in January, use the spread feature to perform an equal distribution of values into January, February, and March. a) Enter 100 for January for DOGACTIVECAN. b) From the EPM Ribbon go to Planning → Spread. The EPM - Spread window opens. c) Set the Values to: Source Value: 100 Destination: $B$2:$D$2 Weights (optional) leave blank Spread Results Overwrite existing values as shown below Figure 234: Spread Function d) Choose OK You should have 33.33 in January, February, and March. 7. In this next scenario, we want to use the weights feature to do our spread. Continued on next page 366 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Spread, Trend, and Weight Manual Planning Functions For the product Ball with Cotton Ropes, spread 100 to January, February, and March, based on a 2, 3, 4 weighting factor. a) For the DOGACTIVECAN product, type 100 in January and delete the February and March values. b) For the Product DOGBALL, type 2, 3, and 4 in the months January, February and March. Product 2012.02 12-Feb 2012.03 12-Mar DOGACTIVECAN High Energy... 100 ... ... DOGBALL - Ball with Cotton Ropes c) 2012.01 12-Jan 2 3 4 From the EPM Ribbon go to Planning → Spread. The EPM - Spread window opens. d) Set the Values as follows: Source Value: 100 Destination: $B$3:$D$3 Weights (optional) $B$3:$D$3 Spread Results Overwrite existing values Your data should look like this: 2012.01 12-Jan DOGACTIVECAN - High Energy... 2012.02 12-Feb 2012.03 12-Mar 100 Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 367
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions DOGBALL - Ball with Cotton Ropes 22.22 BPC430 33.33 44.44 Note: Your number of decimals may be different. Task 2: In this exercise, you will use the trend feature available for your input form within the EPM add-in. 1. Using a base value of 500 in January, use the trend feature to distribute the values for January, February, and March by using the % feature in both overwrite mode. a) Type a value of 500 for DOGCANin January and delete the other values. 2012.01 12-Jan 2012.03 12-Mar DOGACTIVECAN High Energy... ... ... ... DOGBALL - Ball with Cotton Ropes ... ... ... DOGCAN - Natural Canned Food.. b) 2012.02 12-Feb 500 From the EPM Ribbon go to Planning → Trend. The EPM - Trend window opens. c) Set the Values as follows: Source Value: $B$4 Increase Trend Select “By Percentage” and type in 10 Destination: $C$4:$D$4 Trend Results Overwrite existing values Continued on next page 368 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Spread, Trend, and Weight Manual Planning Functions Then choose OK. Your data should look like this: 2012.01 12-Jan 2012.02 12-Feb 2012.03 12-Mar 500 550 605 DOGACTIVECAN - High Energy... DOGBALL Ball with Cotton Ropes DOGCAN Natural Canned Food... Task 3: In this exercise, you will use the weight feature available for your input form within the EPM add-in. 1. Using the base values you just created in the trend task, use the weight feature to add an additional 300 of sales for January, February, and March for the Natural Canned Food. a) From the EPM Ribbon go to Planning → Weight. The EPM - Weight window opens. b) Set the Values as follows: Sum to Allocate: $B$4:$D$4 (Note: After you point to these cells, the system will return the sum of 1655 in that cell when you hit enter) Increase Value to Allocate Select “By Value” and type in 300 Destination: $B$4:$D$4 Then choose Ok Your data should look like this: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 369
    • Unit 3: Distribution and Collection, Comments, and Planning Functions BPC430 2012.01 12-Jan 2012.02 12-Feb 2012.03 12-Mar 590.63 649.69 714.66 DOGACTIVECAN - High Energy... DOGBALL - Ball with Cotton Ropes DOGCAN Natural Canned Food... Note: Your number of decimals may be different. Task 4: Use Spread, Trend, and Weight together Use all three function without the step by step instructions to develop the following result set: Figure 235: Using spread, trend, and weight 1. Clear all existing data by highlighting all data, and calling the Excel Context Menu and choosing Clear Contents. a) 2. Highlight all data. Right mouse click and choose Clear Data. Starting with a value of 200 for DOGACTIVECAN. in January 2012, use the three features to derive the data set above. a) b) Use the Spread function for DOGBALL to allocate 1000 in sales equally. c) 370 Use the Trend function for DOGACTIVECAN to increase sales by 10%. Use the Weight function to add an additional 100 in sales to DOGACTIVECAN. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using the Spread, Trend, and Weight Manual Planning Functions Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Evaluate the features of spread, trend, and weight to see if they will meet some of your business requirements. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 371
    • Unit Summary BPC430 Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Distribute static reports to file directories • Distribute static reports via e-mail • Collect off line data • Describe the features of comments • Save comments with the EPMSaveComment function • Save comments with the ribbon command • Report on comments • Evaluate the features of spread, trend, and weight to see if they will meet some of your business requirements. 372 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • Unit Summary 373 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit Summary 374 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit 4 Business Process Flows Unit Overview This unit covers Business Process Flows. Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • Create a Business Process Flow Run a Business Process Flow Unit Contents Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows .......................... 376 Procedure: Adding Hyperlinks ................................................ 387 Exercise 15: Create a Business Process Flow for Planning.............. 395 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 375
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn how to create a Business Process Flow. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • Create a Business Process Flow Run a Business Process Flow Business Example You are considering the use of a Business Process Flow on your project, so you need to know how to build and use it. Key Features of Business Process Flows To decide whether to use a Business Process Flow, you need to know what the benefits are as well as the cost to implement and maintain. 376 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows The Benefits and Costs of Business Process Flows are shown below: • Benefits: • – Helps with coordination – Web based User Interface / Launchpad – Status and tracking – Guided navigation – E-mail notifications – Steps can be reopened – Steps can be reviewed by higher authorities – Built in Monitor – Delivered detailed reports – Work Status integration – Real time simulations in build mode – Users can save workspaces during execution Costs: – – – – 2011 Has to be designed and configured Has to be maintained Has to be supported by the help desk Users cannot be forced to use the Business Process Flow user interface © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 377
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Key Terms • • • • • • • • • Process Template - A sequential grouping of activities to complete a process Activities - The activities for which the logged-on user can perform Activity Regions - The members that an activity is executed by Process Instance - An iteration of a business process flow template that is in active use Process monitor - Users who can monitor the instances of a template Performer - A User(s) or Team assigned to a Dimension. Performers can complete or submit (for approval) activities for example. Reviewer - A User(s) or Team assigned to a Dimension. Reviewers approve or reject submitted activities. Workspace - A tab in the Web Interface with links to activities Hyperlink - A link in a workspace which defines the action that occurs when chosen Business Process Flow Activities In this section, you will learn how to use Activities. From the Home tab, go to Activities. The upper area renders all processes that you are involved in. The lower area renders the activities for that process. Note: By choosing an activity, you can use the Actions button to change the status to complete for example.
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Figure 236: Activities in Run Mode Running Business Process Flows When an activity is chosen, a separate workspace tab is opened. You can see an example below. In the Business Process Flow side panel, you can see all the related hyperlinks. This makes an end user’s work easier as they can perform the same type of actions without going back to their activity workspace. Note: Each workspace has its own context. The context below is set to Budget, 2010, and Total. The workspace context can be used as a default data selection for all of the hyperlinks in the workspace. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 379
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Figure 237: Data Manager Workspace Note: In the above screen shot, the plus (+) sign can be used display all of the dimensions. The cube icon is used to display the Model that was selected in the process settings, and to Display Dimension Names in the context. When an EPM add-in activity is selected, a special Business Process Flow pane opens up as you can see below. This special pane includes related actions that you can easily build into the workspace. There is also a push button that can be used to return to the Activity Workspace. Figure 238: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Action Pane 380 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Business Process Flow Statuses To be able to use a Business Process Flow, you need to be familiar with all of the possible statuses. Business Process Flow Statuses Status Resulting Status To Be Performed Waiting for completion or waiting to be submitted Submitted Action has been submitted and the activity is waiting for review Completed Activity is fully completed Reopened Completed activity has been reopened. Pending Activity is waiting for a predecessor activity to be completed. It is not possible to take any actions on pending activities. Rejected A reviewer has rejected an activity, the activity is open again for user action Delayed Completion of the activity has been delayed due to the predecessor activity being reopened. It is not possible to take any actions on the delayed activity. Note: The Performer of an activity is the person responsible for completing the activity. The reviewer is the person who must verify the actions taken by the Performer in a particular activity context. Performers and reviewers can be individuals or made up of a team. Two or more users can select the same activity concurrently, as multiple users may be involved in the completion of one activity. Opening Criteria allows you to either force all the participants (activity regions) of an activity to be completed before anyone can proceed or allow a participant (activity region) to proceed to the next activity even if everyone is not complete yet. For example, in the shaded activity below, Europe must wait for the US under the criteria All. If the criteria is Matched then Europe can proceed. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 381
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Opening Criteria Activity Activity Region Opening Criteria: All Opening Criteria: Matched Complete Complete US Complete Complete Europe Complete Complete US To Be Performed To Be Performed Run Currency Translation Europe Pending To Be Performed US Pending Pending Book Manual Journal Entries Europe Pending Pending US Pending Pending Import actual data Europe Run Controls Below, you can see the completed status for the activities of a process template. Figure 239: Completed Activities Creating Process Templates A process template describes a monthly activity, such as line managers entering monthly actual budget data. Note: Separate templates would be called for in cases where you have two totally different processes. For example, a corporation may have one planning Business Process Flow and one closing Business Process Flow. Below, you can see how the Business Process Flow components are related. 382 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Figure 240: Process Template Components In this section, you will learn how to create a Process Template. The Process Settings contain the general properties of the template. Figure 241: Business Process Flow - Process Settings 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 383
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Process Settings Fields Field Definition Name This will be the name of the process Description A brief description of the process Model The model governs both the dimensions that can make up the process instance and the available dimensions for the activity context. Dimensions The dimensions that make up the instances are defined here Process Monitors This user(s) can monitor all the instances created from this template Creating Business Process Flow Activities The activities will be used to track the progress of the process. Figure 242: Activities Note: The square icon next to each activity can be used to duplicate the activity or move it up or down. The activity settings provide instructions to the users and also control the behavior of the activity. 384 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Figure 243: Activity Settings Activity Fields Field Name Provide a title for the activity. Instruction Provide a description of what is to be done in the activity. This is the instruction that is displayed to a user performing a process based on this process template. Driving dimension This dimension is used to determine the granularity of the activity and to determine the Performers. For example, if you want to run an activity once per region, use the Entity dimension because it has a hierarchy by region. Members Select the members of the Driving Dimension. For example, choose the US parent so that it is children (regions) will determine the granularity of the activity. Performer Select the property that defines the performer for each member of the Driving Dimension. You can select the Owner property or any other property for this. Require Reviewer 2011 Definition To define an action that a reviewer must approve or reject © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 385
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Reviewer Select the property that defines the Reviewer for each member of the Driving Dimension. You can select the Reviewer property or any other property for this. Opening Criteria Choose either All activity contexts or Matched activity contexts. Allow Reopen To allow authorized users to reopen an activity, select the Yes radio button. Creating Business Process Flow Workspaces Workspaces will contain the groups of related hyperlinks for the users. For example, when using automatic planning functions, you might copy actual to plan, revalue the data, then run a comparison report. Figure 244: Planning Functions Workspace There are 3 ways to add contents to the Activity Workspace. 1. 2. 3. 386 Add Hyperlinks: Refer to the section below for more information. Add Content: You can embed existing web contents (Report, Input form, Workspace) to the Activity Workspace. Add New Report: Using this, you can create a new report from scratch. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Adding Hyperlinks 1. Add new hyperlinks by clicking the Add Hyperlinks button. A new hyperlinks view is added in the left side panel, and in the main canvas, a new Hyperlink is added. 2. Set the properties in the Edit Hyperlink pane on the right-hand side. 3. Click the Browse button to navigate to a desired report for example. 4. Click the Save button to save the hyperlink. 5. Save the Process Template. Creating Business Process Flow Hyperlinks Hyperlinks contain the actions, Model, context, and related actions. Figure 245: Upload File Hyperlink Note: You can simulate hyperlinks at design-time. Click Stop Editing, then the name of hyperlink becomes available just like at run time. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 387
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Creating Business Process Flow Related Actions Related actions result in hyperlinks for the user which provide guided navigation for activities. For example, after importing a file, you might want to Preview it. Figure 246: Upload File - Related Action Template Version Management Business Process Flow Templates are managed using version information. There are three types of versions available in Business Process Flow Templates: 1. 2. Draft - Draft is set by default for a new process template. This version can be edited and deleted. Deployed - Templates in Draft status can be Deployed. Then you can create an Instance for it. When the template is in Deployed status, users cannot make changes to the template. This version cannot be Archived either. 3. Inactive - Inactive versions cannot be used. Note: Template versions may have: 1. 2. 3. Only 1 Draft version for any given template Only 1 Deployed version for a given template Multiple Inactive versions for a given template Creating Business Process Flow Instances A process template could describe a monthly activity, such as cost center managers entering monthly actual budget data. In that case, each month would be a separate instance. 388 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows One user will be chosen as the Performer of the process instance. That user has the right to finalize the process instance. These are the steps included in the Wizard: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the Process - The related activities appear on the right Select the Owner - The Owner can finalize the instance for example Select the Context - Choose the members for the Instance Context such as 2012 Budget Check Assignments - Maintain the Performer and Reviewer assignments if necessary Review and Start - Review the instance metadata. Select Start the Process Instance to create the instance in Running status upon completion. Figure 247: Creating an Instance When you create an Instance, a wizard is launched. Note: The instance takes a snapshot of the template. If you make changes to the template, only new instances created after that point will include the revisions. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 389
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 After an Instance is created, these are the activities that are available. • • • • • • Start - To start a process Instance Suspend / resume - Suspended Instances are not available to users. Change Assignment - Process Owner and Activity Owners can be changed by selecting the Change Assignment option Reset - To reset an instance back to the first activity Archive - To archive finalized or inactive instances. An archived process does is not available for users. Finalize - You can finalize a process instance if you are the process instance Owner Note: Archived instances can be reported on if Audit of Business Process Flow Activity is turned on. Audit reports are available in the Home tab under Audit. Run the Administration Activity report. E-mail Notification Process monitors receive an e-mail notification when a new process instance is created, suspended, resumed, reset, ready to be finalized and archived. The owner of an activity receives an e-mail notification when the activity is open to perform, approved/rejected by reviewer, and reopened. The responsible reviewer for an activity receives an e-mail notification when the activity is ready for review. Note: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Version for the NetWeaver Platform contains a number of e-mail templates by default. These are S-type (system) templates, which cannot be modified. A copy of each system template can be created and customized according to the business needs. These are C-type (customized) templates. The program used to generate e-mails is: UJB_MAINTAIN_EMAIL_TMPL. The table where the templates are stored is: UJB_EMAIL10 - BPC: Business Process Flow Email Template Table. New e-mail templates can be created via the SMARTFORM transaction code. Below is an example of the information contained in an e-mail. 390 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows It includes the following: • • • • • The Process The Context The action, such as: The following activity has been reopened. The activity and the owner A link to the activity Figure 248: A Sample E-mail Integration If you decide to use business process flows, you should also consider how they interact with security and work status. A user's activities in the business process flow guide them to tasks that need to be performed and data that needs to be viewed or changed. Therefore, the users need to have the relevant task profile to carry out their assigned activities. They also need to have access to the relevant data via Data Access Profiles. In addition, by including work status in the business process flow, users will be able to control data access at appropriate points in the process. In the example below, the entity dimension is used to determine the owners, reviewers, and managers for Store1. So for Store1, Joe is the owner, Nicole is the reviewer, and Pete is the Manager. The User Actions contains the sequence of activities in this example. When Joe submits Step4. Nicole is notified via e-mail and she accepts it. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 391
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Since Pete is the manager of Store1, he can set the work state to Reviewed and then Approved. If the work state is Reviewed for example, no one can run a data manager package for that data region, since it is Locked. The work state options are defined as follows. • • • • All - All users are allowed to perform the activity Locked - Users are Locked out of that activity Owner - Only the Owner can perform the activity Manager - Only the Manager can perform the activity Status Controlled By determines who can change the work state. In the example below, the Manager can advance the work state to Approved and back to Reviewed. The Work status interfaces are the methods that users can save data or documents to the data base. They are defined as follows: • • • • • Data Manager - running data manager packages Journals - posting journal entries Manual - manually entering and saving data Documents - posting document attachments Comments - saving comments to the data base Note: The diagram below is a conceptual illustration. 392 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Figure 249: Security, Work Status, Business Process Flow Integration Concept Note: Pete is the implied manager of Store1 since he is the owner of the parent (US) of Store1. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 393
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows 394 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Exercise 15: Create a Business Process Flow for Planning Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and run a Business Process Flow - Process Template for Planning Business Example You need to create a Business Process Flow for your Planning Process. Task 1: Create a Process Template. 1. Access Process Templates in Administration. 2. Create a new template with a Name and Description of Expense_Planning. Complete the Process Settings as you see below. Hint: For the Users, choose the Role tab and select the ADMIN Team and choose the Add pushbutton. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 395
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Figure 250: Process Settings 3. Create the Import Actual Data Activity as you see below. Figure 251: Import Actual Data Settings Continued on next page 396 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows 4. Create the remaining two activities as you see below. Hint: Use the context menu to Duplicate one activity to the next. Figure 252: Activities 5. Set “require a reviewer” for the Planning Functions activity. Task 2: Create the Import Actual Data Workspace. 1. Create a Performer Workspace. Hint: Page down to see Workspaces. 2. Create the Upload File Hyperlink as you see below. Include a related action to preview the file. Fields Values Name Upload_File Description Upload Flat File Target Action Data Manager → Data Upload Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 397
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Model EXPENSE Name of Related Action Preview Related Action to Perform Data Manager → Data preview Figure 253: Upload File Hyperlink 3. Create the Import File Hyperlink with the values below. Include a related action to View Package Status. Fields Values Name Import File Description Import Flat File Target Action Data Manager → Run specific package Model EXPENSE Name of Related Action Check Status Related Action to Perform Data Manager → View Package Status Continued on next page 398 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows 4. Rename your Hyperlink to Upload and Import. Note: You may have different dimension members in your context. However, the context is irrelevant for Data Manager activities. Figure 254: Import Actuals Workspace 5. Save your Process Template. Task 3: Create the Planning Functions Workspace. 1. Create a Performer Workspace. 2. Create the Automatic Planning Hyperlink as you see below. Fields Values Name Copy Description Copy Actual to Forecast Target Action Data Manager → Run specific package Model EXPENSE Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 399
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows 3. BPC430 Underneath Copy, Add the Revaluation Hyperlink with the values below. Fields Name Revaluation Description Mark up Personnel Cost by 4.5% Target Action Data Manager → Run specific package Model 4. Values EXPENSE Add a Hyperlink with the values below. Fields Name Run Comparison Report Description Compare Actual to Forecast Target Action Microsoft Excel → Open specific report Model 5. Values EXPENSE Rename your Hyperlinks to Automatic Planning and Reporting Figure 255: Automatic Planning Workspace 6. Save your Process Step. 7. Save your Process Template. Continued on next page 400 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Task 4: Create the Manual Input Planning Workspace. 1. Create a Performer Workspace. 2. Create the Cost of Goods Sold Hyperlink as you see below. Fields Name Cost of Goods Sold Description Input Cost of Goods Sold Target Action Microsoft Excel → Open specific input form Model 3. Values EXPENSE Below Cost of Goods Sold, Add the Indirect Expenses Hyperlink with the values below. Fields Name Indirect Expenses Description Input Indirect Expenses Target Action Microsoft Excel → Open specific input form Model 4. Values EXPENSE Add the Data Control Hyperlink with the values below. Fields Name Work Status Description Set new work state Target Action Work Status and Comments → Set work status Model 5. Values EXPENSE Rename your Hyperlinks as shown below: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 401
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Figure 256: Input Schedules Workspace 6. Save your Process Step. 7. Save and Deploy your Process Template. Task 5: Create the Process Instance. 1. Create a Process Instance for your Process Template. 2. Select the owner. 3. Select a context of Forecast and 2012. 4. Review the assignments. 5. Start the process on completion. 6. Finish the instance creation. Task 6: Execute your activities. 1. Access your activities in the Home Workspace. 2. Open the Import Actual Data Workspace.. 3. Upload and preview the 2011 Actual flat file. 4. Import the 2011 Actual flat file. Continued on next page 402 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows 5. Complete the Import Actual Data activity and return to your activities. 6. Complete Import Actual Data for Manufacturing. 7. Open Planning Functions and Copy Actual to Forecast. 8. Revalue the Forecast data 9. Compare actual to forecast data. 10. Submit and approve planning functions. 11. Perform manual input planning. 12. Approve the data. 13. Complete Manual Input Planning for Consulting. 14. Run the Process Monitor. 15. Archive the Instance. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 403
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Solution 15: Create a Business Process Flow for Planning Task 1: Create a Process Template. 1. Access Process Templates in Administration. a) b) Choose Planning and Consolidation Administration c) 2. In the Web Client goto the Home Tab → Start Page Choose Business Process Flows → Process Templates Create a new template with a Name and Description of Expense_Planning. Complete the Process Settings as you see below. Hint: For the Users, choose the Role tab and select the ADMIN Team and choose the Add pushbutton. Continued on next page 404 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Figure 257: Process Settings a) 3. Choose New and complete your settings as you see above. Create the Import Actual Data Activity as you see below. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 405
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Figure 258: Import Actual Data Settings a) Go to the Activities tab b) Under Process Settings, choose New c) Enter a Name and Instruction of Import Actual Data d) Create the rest of the settings as you see above. Hint: When you select Members, the dialog box will look like the screenshot below. Note: When members are selected, their hierarchy may collapse, but it is ok, they are still selected. Figure 259: Driving Dimension Members 4. Create the remaining two activities as you see below. Hint: Use the context menu to Duplicate one activity to the next. Continued on next page 406 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Figure 260: Activities a) b) Repeat one more time c) Click on the second activity and change the Name and Instruction to Planning Functions on the right. d) 5. Under Process Settings, select Import Actual Data→ click on the context menu (little square)→ Duplicate → OK Click on the third activity and change the Name and Instruction to Manual Input Planning on the right. Set “require a reviewer” for the Planning Functions activity. a) Choose Planning Functions → Select Require Reviewer b) Next to Reviewer: select REVIEWER from the drop down list c) Select Allow Reopen d) Choose Save The template is saved and you are on the Process Settings tab e) Choose the Activities tab Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 407
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Task 2: Create the Import Actual Data Workspace. 1. Create a Performer Workspace. Hint: Page down to see Workspaces. a) Choose the Import Actual Data Activity. b) In Workspaces, choose Create. A new tab is created called Import Actual Data. 2. Create the Upload File Hyperlink as you see below. Include a related action to preview the file. Fields Values Name Upload_File Description Upload Flat File Target Action Data Manager → Data Upload Model EXPENSE Name of Related Action Preview Related Action to Perform Data Manager → Data preview Continued on next page 408 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 409
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Figure 261: Upload File Hyperlink a) On the upper right, choose Add Hyperlinks Edit Hyperlink appears on the right. b) Enter a Name of Upload_File and Description of Upload Flat File. c) Select a Target Action of Data Manager → Data upload. d) Next to Model: select EXPENSE e) Scroll down. f) Under Related Actions, click Edit. The Related Actions dialog appears. g) Choose New A Related Action is created. h) Under New, select Related Action. i) Next to Name of Related Action, enter Preview. j) Under Action to perform when users choose this hyperlink, select Data Manager. k) Under Data Manager, select Data preview. Figure 262: Upload File - Related Action l) 3. Choose OK. Create the Import File Hyperlink with the values below. Include a related action to View Package Status. Continued on next page 410 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Fields Values Name Import File Description Import Flat File Target Action Data Manager → Run specific package Model EXPENSE Name of Related Action Check Status Related Action to Perform Data Manager → View Package Status a) Choose Add Edit Hyperlink appears on the right. b) Enter a Name and Description as shown above. c) Select a Target Action of Data Manager → Run specific package. d) Choose Browse → Public → Data Management → Import Transaction Data Last Overwrite then choose OK. e) Next to Model: select EXPENSE. f) Under Related Actions click Edit The Related Actions dialog appears. g) Click New. A Related Action is created h) i) Next to Name of Related Action, enter Check Status. j) Under Action to perform when users choose this hyperlink select Data Manager k) 4. Under New, choose Related Action. Under Data Manager, select View package status. Then, choose OK. Rename your Hyperlink to Upload and Import. Note: You may have different dimension members in your context. However, the context is irrelevant for Data Manager activities. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 411
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Figure 263: Import Actuals Workspace a) Under Overview, hover over the Hyperlink. The options box appears. b) Click Options. The context menu appears. c) d) Choose Save. e) In the message box, you will see Workspace has been saved. f) Choose OK g) 5. Choose Rename. Enter Upload and Import. Close the Import Actual Data tab. Save your Process Template. a) Choose Save. Go back to the Activities tab. Continued on next page 412 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Task 3: Create the Planning Functions Workspace. 1. Create a Performer Workspace. a) b) 2. Under Import Actual Data, choose Planning Functions. Under Workspaces, choose Create. Create the Automatic Planning Hyperlink as you see below. Fields Values Name Copy Description Copy Actual to Forecast Target Action Data Manager → Run specific package Model EXPENSE a) Choose Add Hyperlinks Edit Hyperlink appears on the right. b) c) Select a Target Action of Data Manager → Run specific package. d) Choose Browse → Public → Data Management → Copy. Then, choose OK. e) 3. Enter a Name and Description as shown above. Next to Model: select EXPENSE. Underneath Copy, Add the Revaluation Hyperlink with the values below. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 413
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Fields Values Name Revaluation Description Mark up Personnel Cost by 4.5% Target Action Data Manager → Run specific package Model EXPENSE a) Next to Validate, choose Add. Edit Hyperlink appears on the right b) c) Select a Target Action of Data Manager → Run specific package. d) Choose Browse → Public → Financial Processes → REVAL_LABOR then choose OK. e) 4. Enter a Name and Description as shown above Next to Model: select EXPENSE. Add a Hyperlink with the values below. Continued on next page 414 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Fields Values Name Run Comparison Report Description Compare Actual to Forecast Target Action Microsoft Excel → Open specific report Model EXPENSE a) Choose Add Hyperlinks. b) Enter a Name and Description as shown above. c) Select a Target Action of Microsoft Excel → Open specific report d) Choose Browse → Public → VERSION COMPARISON then choose OK e) Next to Model:, select EXPENSE. f) Under Target Context, make the following selections: Dimension P_ACCOUNT Indirect Expenses P_CATEGORY Actual P_COST Use Workspace Context P_CURR Local Currency P_TIME 5. Selection 2012 Rename your Hyperlinks to Automatic Planning and Reporting Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 415
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Figure 264: Automatic Planning Workspace a) Under Overview, hover over the first hyperlink. The options box appears. b) Left click on Options. The context menu appears. c) d) 6. Select Rename. Enter Automatic Planning Rename the bottom hyperlink to Reporting. Save your Process Step. a) b) In the message box, you will see Workspace has been saved. c) Choose OK. d) 7. Choose Save. Close the Planning Functions tab. Save your Process Template. a) Choose Save. Go back to the Activities tab. Continued on next page 416 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Task 4: Create the Manual Input Planning Workspace. 1. Create a Performer Workspace. a) b) 2. Under Planning Functions, choose Manual Input Planning. Under Workspaces choose Create. Create the Cost of Goods Sold Hyperlink as you see below. Fields Values Name Cost of Goods Sold Description Input Cost of Goods Sold Target Action Microsoft Excel → Open specific input form Model EXPENSE a) On the upper right, choose Add Hyperlinks. b) Enter a Name and Description as shown above. c) Select a Target Action of Microsoft Excel → Open specific input form. Choose Browse → Public → MANUAL INPUT PLANNING → OK. d) Next to Model: select EXPENSE. e) Under Target Context, make the following selections: Dimension P_ACCOUNT Cost of Goods Sold P_CATEGORY Forecast P_COST Use Workspace Context P_CURR Local Currency P_TIME 3. Selection 2012 Below Cost of Goods Sold, Add the Indirect Expenses Hyperlink with the values below. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 417
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Fields Values Name Indirect Expenses Description Input Indirect Expenses Target Action Microsoft Excel → Open specific input form Model EXPENSE a) Next to Validate, choose Add. Edit Hyperlink appears on the right. b) Enter a Name and Description as shown above. c) Select a Target Action of Microsoft Excel → Open specific input form. Choose Browse → Public → MANUAL INPUT PLANNING→ OK d) Next to Model: select EXPENSE. e) Under Target Context, make the following selections: Dimension P_ACCOUNT Indirect Expenses P_CATEGORY Forecast P_COST Use Workspace Context P_CURR Local Currency P_TIME 4. Selection 2012 Add the Data Control Hyperlink with the values below. Continued on next page 418 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows Fields Values Name Work Status Description Set new work state Target Action Work Status and Comments → Set work status Model EXPENSE a) b) Enter a Name and Description as shown above. c) Select a Target Action of Work Status and Comments → Set work status. d) 5. Choose Add Hyperlinks. Next to Model: select EXPENSE. Rename your Hyperlinks as shown below: Figure 265: Input Schedules Workspace a) Under Overview, hover over the first hyperlink. b) Click Options. c) Select Rename. Enter Input Schedules. d) Rename the bottom hyperlink to Data Control. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 419
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows 6. BPC430 Save your Process Step. a) b) In the message box, you will see Workspace has been saved. c) Choose OK. d) 7. Choose Save. Close the Manual Input Planning tab. Save and Deploy your Process Template. a) Choose Save → Close. Your template is complete. b) Highlight your template Hint: If you accidentally click the hyperlink, the template will open. Just choose Close. c) Choose Deploy. The Current Version changes from Draft to Deployed. Task 5: Create the Process Instance. 1. Create a Process Instance for your Process Template. a) Choose Process Instances. b) Click New. c) Select your Process. Your three activities appear. 2. Select the owner. a) b) 3. Choose Next. Next to Name: select BPC-## from the drop down list. Select a context of Forecast and 2012. a) Choose Next. b) Select Forecast and 2012 as the context. Continued on next page 420 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows 4. Review the assignments. a) Choose Next. The Check Assignments step is reached. 5. Start the process on completion. a) Choose Next. b) Select Start the process instance. The instance will be in Running status on completion. 6. Finish the instance creation. a) Choose Finish → Close Caution: The instance creates a snapshot of the template. If you find that you need to make changes to the template, you will need to Suspend it, Archive it, and then create a new instance. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 421
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Task 6: Execute your activities. 1. Access your activities in the Home Workspace. a) Go to the Home tab and choose Activities. b) Under Process, choose the EXPENSE_PLANNING Process. Figure 266: Activities in Run Mode 2. Open the Import Actual Data Workspace.. a) Click Import Actual Data for Consulting. The Import Actual Data tab opens. b) Choose Upload_File. After a few seconds, the EPM add-In opens and the Data Manager Upload dialog appears. If not, check your status bar for Excel. Continued on next page 422 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows 3. Upload and preview the 2011 Actual flat file. a) Choose Browse. b) If you are in the BPC420 class: Next to Look in: choose the drop down and select My Documents → BPC420 → BPC420_##. c) If you are in the BPC430 class: Next to Look in: choose the drop down and select My Documents → BPC430 → BPC430_##. d) Select 2011 Actual → Open → Upload → Save → OK The file is now on the server. e) Choose Preview . f) In the Open dialog → Select the 2011 Actual file → Open g) Under Select file type or table select Delimited. h) Under Select a delimiter, choose COMMA. Figure 267: Flat File Preview i) Choose Cancel. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 423
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows 4. BPC430 Import the 2011 Actual flat file. a) Choose Import_File. b) Choose Browse → 2011 Actual → Open c) Choose Next → Browse → EXP TRANS → Open d) Choose Next. Merge data values ... should be selected. e) Choose Next and select No. Default logic will not be run. f) Choose Next and select No. Work status will not be checked. g) Choose Next then choose Finish. The EPM - Data Manager window appears. h) Choose OK, then choose the link for Check Status. You should have a status of Succeed. Note: If your log does not appear, go to the Data Manager tab and view data. i) j) Close Excel by choosing Office → Exit Excel. k) 5. Close the Package Status window by choosing Close. Return to the Web Client. Complete the Import Actual Data activity and return to your activities. a) b) Close the Import Actual Data tab. c) 6. Under Import Actual Data - Consulting, select Complete. Go to the Home tab and choose Activities. Complete Import Actual Data for Manufacturing. a) Highlight the row for Import Actual Data for Manufacturing. b) Choose Actions and select Complete. Planning Functions are now ready To Perform. c) Close the Import Actual Data tab for Manufacturing. Continued on next page 424 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows 7. Open Planning Functions and Copy Actual to Forecast. a) Choose Planning Functions for Consulting. A new tab opens. b) Choose Automatic Planning → Copy. After a few seconds, an EPM add-in session is opened along with a dialog box Run Package with the Merge Data option selected. If not, look in your status bar for Excel. c) Choose Next. The option Select whether to run default logic ... appears. d) Select No → Next. The option Select whether to check work status ... appears. e) Select No → Next. A screen with Select the members to COPY and where to appears. f) Make the following selections by choosing the Add buttons for each: Hint: For P_Time, select only the months of 2011 for the Source and only the months for 2012 as the Destination. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 425
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Figure 268: Copy Package g) Choose Next → Finish → OK. h) Close the dialog box if necessary. Continued on next page 426 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows 8. Revalue the Forecast data a) Under Copy, choose Revaluation. b) Select the following by choosing the Add buttons for each: Dimension Value Selection Relationship P_Category Forecast Member Only P_Curr LC Member Only P_Time 2012.01 to 2012.12 Caution: When making selections, you may notice the system goes back to the Web Client. If so, look for Excel in your task bar. c) Select Next → Finish → OK. d) Choose the Data Manager tab and click View Status. You should have a status of Succeed. e) Close the dialog box. f) Close Excel. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 427
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows 9. BPC430 Compare actual to forecast data. a) In the Planning Functions tab, click Reporting → Run Comparison Report. The report opens in the EPM add-in. b) Choose the EPM tab, and click Refresh. Figure 269: Version Comparison Actual values have been copied to 2012 and Personnel Cost has been marked up by 4.5%. c) Close Excel. 10. Submit and approve planning functions. a) In the Planning Functions tab, choose Submit. b) Close the Planning Functions tab. c) On your Home tab, highlight Planning Functions for Consulting. d) Choose Actions. e) Select Approve. f) Highlight Planning Functions for Manufacturing. g) Choose Actions. h) Select Submit. The Action Required changes to To Review. i) Choose Actions. j) Select Approve. Continued on next page 428 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows 11. Perform manual input planning. a) Choose Manual Input Planning for Manufacturing. The Manual Input Planning tab appears. b) Choose Input Schedules → Cost of Goods Sold. An input schedule with no values opens in the EPM add-in. If you don't see after a moment, check your task bar for Excel. c) Choose the EPM tab, then Refresh. d) Enter your Material and Labor Cost values as shown below: (Cost of Goods Sold will be calculated). Figure 270: Manufacturing COGS e) Click Save Data. A prompt appears: data records will be sent, do you want to continue? f) Choose Yes. A dialog with the Save Results appears. g) Choose OK h) Choose the EPM tab and click Refresh. i) Close Excel. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 429
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 12. Approve the data. a) In the Manual Input Planning tab, choose Data Control → Work Status. The Work Status dialog appears for Manufacturing. b) Next to New Status, select Approved then choose → Apply. You successfully changed the work state. c) Choose Close to close the Successwindow. d) Choose Complete. e) Close the Manual Input Planning tab. 13. Complete Manual Input Planning for Consulting. a) Highlight Manual Input Planning for Consulting. b) Choose Actions and select Complete. Figure 271: Completed Activities Continued on next page 430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Creating Planning Business Process Flows 14. Run the Process Monitor. a) On the Home tab, under Activities choose Process Monitor. b) Click on Expense_Planning to view the results. c) Close the EXPENSE_PLANNING tab after viewing. d) In the Process Monitor highlight EXPENSE_PLANNING. Figure 272: Process Monitor - Waiting Finalization e) Choose Finalize. 15. Archive the Instance. a) In Administration, under Business Process Flows → Process Instances highlight the instance EXPENSE_PLANNING - Forecast 2012 and choose Archive. Hint: If you do not have the Administration tab open, choose Start Page → Planning and Consolidation Administration. The process instance will no longer appear in your Activities. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 431
    • Unit 4: Business Process Flows BPC430 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create a Business Process Flow • Run a Business Process Flow 432 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Unit Summary Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Create a Business Process Flow • Run a Business Process Flow 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 433
    • Unit Summary 434 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • Unit Summary 435 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit Summary 436 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit 5 Web Integration Unit Overview This unit includes the Web Interface, Web Reports, and Books Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • Describe the Home tab Use the built-in screens Use the Library and Workspaces to organize your reports Explain functionality differences in the web and Excel clients Set your context defaults Create web reports Create input forms Create workspaces Create Book Publication templates Print workbooks Publish to PDF Unit Contents Lesson: Using The Web Client.................................................... 438 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces ................. 448 Exercise 16: Creating Web Reports, Web Input Forms, and Workspaces ..................................................................... 455 Lesson: Publishing Books ......................................................... 467 Exercise 17: Using Books ..................................................... 481 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 437
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Lesson: Using The Web Client Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn how to use the Web Client Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • Describe the Home tab Use the built-in screens Use the Library and Workspaces to organize your reports Explain functionality differences in the web and Excel clients Business Example Your users need an entry point for Planning and Consolidation to access their activities, documents, workspaces, and audit reports. The Home Tab The web client is a good way for your users to access the web features as well as to connect in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in for example. When you log in to the web client, you are taken to the Home tab and the Start Page. The Header area of the Home Tab shows who is logged in, a button to log off, a hyperlink to customize a users’ preferences, and a hyperlink for Help. The Home Tab can be broken into five main areas: • • • • • 438 Header area - Describes who is logged in, a link to change Preferences, and a link to Help Built-in screens - Activities, Process Monitor, Library, Documents, Consolidation Central, and Audit Create - Workspace, Report, and Input Forms Launch area - To launch the EPM Add-in for Excel, EPM Add-in for Word, EPM Add-in for PowerPoint, and Planning and Consolidation Administration Footer - Shows the Environment you are currently in as well as links to view your access rights, Download Center, and About (the product) © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using The Web Client Figure 273: Home Tab - Start Page Note: The Consolidation Central module in BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation enables you to generate and manage consolidated data, giving you an accurate view of the financial situation of your organization. Within Consolidation Central, there are four sub steps: Consolidation Monitor, Controls Monitor, Journals, and Ownership Manager. User Preferences A user can customize the User Interface by adjusting the Text size (100, 150, or 200) percentage as well as the Theme. The default theme is Streamline, which is black with a white background. The High Contrast Theme is solid black with white lettering and the Signature Theme contains a light blue background with black lettering. Language, Time, Date and Number format can also be customized by the user. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 439
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Figure 274: User Preferences My Security To see the current users’ access rights, click the hyperlink to Show Access Rights. When this is clicked, a new tab is opened, allowing the user to see the current environment, ID of the current user, the Full Name, and the e-mail address of the current user. Additionally, the user can see which Teams, Task Profiles, and Data Access Profiles they are assigned to. This screen is read only. 440 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using The Web Client Figure 275: My Security Changing Environments To change to a different environment, click the current environment hyperlink and a listing of available environments will be listed. Select the one you want, then click Connect. Figure 276: Changing Environments 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 441
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Accessing Activities Activities lists the processes that you, as the currently logged-on user, can access to perform or review actions. The user can view Active, Finalized or All activities. In the Details area, the user can view Action Required, Not Completed or All items. Activities will be covered more in-depth in a later unit. Figure 277: Accessing Activities The Process Monitor The process monitor displays a complete list of processes, and the full set of information for individual process instances. Note: An instance is an iteration of a process. For example, you carry out the planning process for the instance 2012 plan version 1. The process instance owner can finalize and reopen steps from the process monitor. The user can view Active, Finalized or All Processes by toggling the Status dropdown. The Process Monitor will be covered more in-depth in a later unit. 442 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using The Web Client Figure 278: The Process Monitor The Library The Library enables you to create, open, delete, and edit Planning and Consolidation objects, such as workspaces, reports and input forms, SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards, and books. These objects can be stored in three different folders: 1. 2. 3. Private - only you have access Public - everyone has access Teams - only a specific Team has access Favorites allows the user to group objects together that they use frequently. The Folder column shows the folder where the object is actually stored. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 443
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Figure 279: Web Library Documents The Documents view is a central repository for storing or sharing files and websites. You can use the features of the Documents view to post, share, and retrieve files or the contents of a website, and to manage the display of content. Figure 280: Documents Audit Audit allows the user to prepare reports containing system information. Security Audit reports can be reported by Users, Teams, Task Profiles, and Data Access Profiles. Additionally, reports can be created on data changes, comments, work status, and administration activity. 444 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using The Web Client Figure 281: Audit Workspaces A Workspace allows the user to store Content (documents), Reports, and Input Forms in single place. Workspaces are edited and viewed in a separate tab. Icons are used for each of the components. Figure 282: Workspaces Workspace Options Options Manage Context Change Model and Change Dimension Names display settings Change Dimension Members Select an existing member to choose a new member Add Dimension 2011 What Is It Used For Add a dimension to the context or add all dimensions © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 445
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Add Content Add web reports or input forms, for example, from the Library Add New Report Create a new web report or input form Save Workspace Save or Save As Workspace Feature Differences Between the Web and Excel Clients If you need to compare the feature differences between the Web Client reports versus the Excel add-in of the EPM Interface, you can use the following table. Feature Differences Between the Web and Excel Clients Feature Excel Client Thin Client Yes No User Must Create a Connection No Yes Report Specific Formulas No Yes Formatting No Yes Execute Data Manager Packages No Yes Drill Through No Yes Charts Yes Yes Drag and Drop Yes Yes Report Data from Other Sources 446 Web Client No Yes © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using The Web Client Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the Home tab • Use the built-in screens • Use the Library and Workspaces to organize your reports • Explain functionality differences in the web and Excel clients 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 447
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn how to work with web reports, input forms, and workspaces. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • Set your context defaults Create web reports Create input forms Create workspaces Business Example You need a way to organize your reports and so you are interested in the Library and Workspaces. Your users also need to do some reporting and light data input in a thin client, the web reports and input forms can easily serve that purpose. Context Defaults Context Defaults control the initial settings when working in the web interface. They are accessed from the Start Page → Planning and Consolidation Administration. You can make the following settings for each dimension of a selected model: • • • • • 448 A default member for the scope context initialized for Reporting in web reports A default member for the scope context initialized for Data Input in web input forms Whether the dimension is displayed or not in the scope context Whether the name of the dimension is displayed in the scope context or not Whether the name, ID, or both of the member is displayed © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces Figure 283: Context Defaults Web Reports Web reports can be accessed via the Library view or via the Start Page if the report has been created as a Favorite. When creating a new web report or input form, the model must be selected first. In the dropdown to select the model, the user can also change the Display Dimension Names settings. Figure 284: Creating a Web Report In the web client, to change the current context, cursor over the dimension to change and click the blue hyperlink dimension member. A box will open the dimension embers allowing the user to navigate to the appropriate member. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 449
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 To add an additional dimension to the context, click the blue plus sign and select the dimension(s) to be displayed. There is also a hyperlink to add all dimensions to the current report at the bottom of the splash screen. As reports are built, live data is displayed and the report is in edit mode. To exit edit mode, you would choose Finish Editing. The context menu will be used to control the data displayed in a web report. Also, in the example below you can see that parents will initially be collapsed but the user can easily expand them by selecting the plus sign. Figure 285: A Sample Web Report in Edit Mode Web Report and Input Form Options in Edit Mode Option Manage Context(the double cube icon) Change Model and Change Dimension Names display settings Change Dimension Members Select an existing member to choose a new member Add Dimension (the plus sign) Add a dimension to the context or add all dimensions Finish Editing Exit edit mode Type Select Report or Input Form Format Change formatting settings Chart 450 What It Is Used For Modify Chart, switch to Show Chart Only versus Show Report and Chart for example © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces Save Save or Save As Available Dimensions Dimensions in the model are displayed Rows Dimensions in the rows are displayed Columns Dimensions in the columns are displayed Select Members Choose to access the Criteria Folder for member selection When you are finished editing the report, the following options are available: Web Report and Input Form Options in Run Mode Option What It Is Used For Manage Context Change Model and Change Dimension Names display settings Change Dimension Members Select an existing member to choose a new member Add Dimension Add a dimension to the context or add all dimensions Refresh Refresh data from the model Save Data To send data to the model - only when using an input form Comments Maintain or view comments for a specific cell Work Status Set a new work state Edit Change the report definition etc. More Print, edit the linked report in a new tab, reload data for a specific cell, properties Save Save or Save As Selecting Members in Web Reports and Input Forms When you create reports and input forms, you can make report specific member selections. The Criteria Editor dialog is used to make the selections. Hint: Use the plus sign to add more selection criteria. Use the x to remove them. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 451
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Figure 286: Criteria Editor The Criteria Editor includes the following options: Criteria Editor Options Option Definition Memberset Selection The dropdown box on the left provides the following selection criteria: • • • • • Selecting Members The drop down box on the right provides the following selection criteria: • 452 Children of - select only the children of the parent Single Member - select only single members Descendants of - select children, grand children, and so on of a parent Base Members of - select only base level members of a parent Fixed List - select and hard code the members Current Context - the member in your context will be used © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces • Select a Fixed Member - use this option to access the Member Selector (see below) Include the Starting Member Include the member being used as the basis of the member selection. For example, if you choose Children of for a fixed selection of 2011.Total, select Include the Starting Member to include 2011.Total. Order Parent Before - to show the total first Parent After - to show the total last When Selecting a Fixed Member you have several selection aids: • • • • Search - click in the search box Display - IDs, Descriptions, and so on Hierarchy - select which hierarchy to choose members from Choose Siblings / Children - when using the Fixed List, then this option is available Figure 287: Member Selection Options Web Report - Format Options While in edit mode, you can make the following formatting changes. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 453
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Figure 288: Web Report - Format Options 454 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces Exercise 16: Creating Web Reports, Web Input Forms, and Workspaces Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a web report. • Create an input form. • Create a workspace. Business Example You need a straight forward way to view and input data in a web screen. And you need to collect related reports together in a workspace for ease of access. Task 1: Set your context defaults for the expense model. 1. Go to administration 2. Go to Context Defaults 3. Set your context defaults as you see below: Figure 289: Context Defaults 4. Save your defaults Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 455
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Task 2: Create a Web Report 1. Go to the report editor for the expense model. Choose Manage Context and confirm that it is set to Model: Expense. Figure 290: New Report 2. Build an account by cost center (P_Cost) report with time in the columns. Display all of the Expense dimensions in your context. Figure 291: Account by Entity 3. View the print preview. Continued on next page 456 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces Figure 292: Print View 4. Save the report to the public folder as BPC430 Web Account by Entity. Task 3: Create a Web Input Form. 1. Go to the input form editor for the expense model. 2. Build an input form with account in the rows and time in the columns 3. Display only months in the columns. 4. Display only base level accounts for in the rows. 5. Save the input form to the public folder as BPC430 Web Account Trend. Task 4: Create a new workspace and add your web report and input form. 1. 2. Add your BPC430 Web Account by Entity. 3. Add your BPC430 Web Account Trend. 4. 2011 Create a new workspace. Save the workspace as Accounting Workspace. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 457
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Solution 16: Creating Web Reports, Web Input Forms, and Workspaces Task 1: Set your context defaults for the expense model. 1. Go to administration a) b) 2. On the Home tab, choose Start Page. Choose Planning and Consolidation Administration Go to Context Defaults a) b) 3. Expand Features Choose Context Defaults Set your context defaults as you see below: Figure 293: Context Defaults a) b) Under Context Defaults for Model: EXPENSE choose Edit c) 4. Under Models, choose Expense. Make your defaults as you see above Save your defaults a) Choose Save b) Choose Close Continued on next page 458 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces Task 2: Create a Web Report 1. Go to the report editor for the expense model. Choose Manage Context and confirm that it is set to Model: Expense. Figure 294: New Report a) On the Home tab, choose Start Page. b) Under Create choose New Report. The New Report tab is created with your context defaults. 2. Build an account by cost center (P_Cost) report with time in the columns. Display all of the Expense dimensions in your context. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 459
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Figure 295: Account by Entity a) Under Available Dimensions, drag P_Cost to the Rows. b) Drag P_Account under P_Cost . in the rows. c) Drag P_Time to the Columns. Your report is displayed in edit mode with live data using your context defaults. d) Choose Add Dimension (the blue plus sign) → Add All Dimensions. All of the Expense dimensions are now displayed. 3. View the print preview. Continued on next page 460 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces Figure 296: Print View a) Choose Finish Editing. b) Choose More. c) Select Print. The print preview is generated and the Print dialog appears. d) e) 4. Choose Cancel. Close the print preview. Save the report to the public folder as BPC430 Web Account by Entity. a) Choose Save → Save. The Save As dialog appears. b) Choose Public. c) Enter a Name of BPC430 Web Account by Entity. d) Enter a Description of BPC430 Web Account by Entity. e) Choose Save. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 461
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Task 3: Create a Web Input Form. 1. Go to the input form editor for the expense model. a) On the Home tab, choose Start Page. b) Under Create choose New Input Form. The New Input Form tab is created with your context defaults. c) Choose Manage Context and confirm that it is set to Model: Expense. Figure 297: Creating a Web Report 2. Build an input form with account in the rows and time in the columns a) Under Available Dimensions, drag P_Account to the Rows b) Drag P_Time to the Columns Your input form is displayed in edit mode with live data using your context defaults Continued on next page 462 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces 3. Display only months in the columns. a) Under Columns choose P_Time→ Select Members. The Criteria Editor dialog appears. b) Choose Children of and select → Base Members of. c) Deselect Include the Starting Member. Figure 298: Criteria Editor d) Choose OK. The months for 2011 are displayed in the columns but not 2011.Total since you did not include the Starting Member. 4. Display only base level accounts for in the rows. a) Under Rows choose P_Account→ Select Members. The Criteria Editor dialog appears. b) Choose Children of and select → Base Members of. c) De-select Include the Starting Member. d) In the right drop down box Select a Fixed Member. The Member Selector opens. e) Select PL600 (Net Income) f) Choose OK twice. The base level accounts of the PL600 (Net Income) parent are displayed in the rows. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 463
    • Unit 5: Web Integration 5. BPC430 Save the input form to the public folder as BPC430 Web Account Trend. a) Choose Save → Save The Save As dialog appears. b) Choose Public. c) Enter a Name of BPC430 Web Account Trend. d) Enter a Description of BPC430 Web Account Trend. e) Choose Save. Task 4: Create a new workspace and add your web report and input form. 1. Create a new workspace. a) In the Home tab, choose Start Page. b) Under Create choose New Workspace. The Untitled Workspace tab is created with your context defaults. 2. Add your BPC430 Web Account by Entity. a) Choose Add Content. b) Select Public. c) Select BPC430 Web Account by Entity. d) Choose OK. The result set is displayed in your workspace. 3. Add your BPC430 Web Account Trend. a) Choose Add Content. b) Select Public. c) Select BPC430 Web Account Trend. d) Choose OK. The result set is displayed in your workspace. Continued on next page 464 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Web Reports, Input Forms, and Workspaces 4. Save the workspace as Accounting Workspace. a) Choose Save Workspace → Save Workspace. b) Select Private. c) Next to Name enter Accounting Workspace. d) Next to Description enter Accounting Workspace. e) Choose Save. f) Choose Overview Figure 299: Accounting Workspace The web report and input form are displayed as icons in the workspace. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 465
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Set your context defaults • Create web reports • Create input forms • Create workspaces 466 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books Lesson: Publishing Books Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn how to publish books. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • Create Book Publication templates Print workbooks Publish to PDF Business Example You need a way to generate precalculated data in pdf format for flash reporting. Overview You can use book publication to either print or generate pdfs in the Home tab in the Library section. Below you can see the Book Publication options in the EPM Ribbon. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 467
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Figure 300: Book Publication - Options The options above are defined as follows: • • • • • Publish Books - Start the book publication wizard New / Open Template - Create a new or open an existing template Save / Save As - Save or Copy a template Validate - Validate the referenced workbook Change Connection - A template is created by default on the first connection used in the workbook. Use this option to select a different connection. A template can only apply to workbooks using the same connection. Excel template Below, you can see a sample workbook. This same template will be used for each of the variable members. 468 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books Figure 301: A Sample Template Note: Any dimension that is not in the rows or columns must be placed in the page axis. Only the first sheet is published as pdf however, multiple sheets in a workbook can be printed. Book Publication Template Before publishing books, you must create a Book Publication template. The template includes the template, section, and workbook names, the workbook, and the selection of dimension members. When creating a new template, the EPM - Book Publication Template dialog pops up. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 469
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Figure 302: Books - Template Header Note: No all of the fields in the template are shown above. The options in the Book Publication template are defined as follows: Book Publication Template Options Options Definition Template Name This is the Book Publication template workbook name Add / Replace For PDFs, the Add/Replace options enable you to replace or add sections to a template based on the selected variable members when you publish more than once. This setting applies to all sections unless Specify by Section is selected. Variable Time Can be used to determine time for all sections Add New Section, Duplicate Section, Delete Section Use these options to maintain sections Section Name Name of the section Report Workbook Select your workbook Workbook Description Enter a description that is different than the section name Select Dimensions Use this option to open a dialogue box to select fixed and variable dimensions Fixed Members Select the fixed dimension members Variable Dimensions Select the variable dimension members Save the template to a This will save the template to another folder different location Note: It is important to include all of the dimensions in the model in either the fixed or variable assignment. Otherwise, the administrator's context member value will be used when Book Publication is executed. Note: Do not use the following characters in your naming convention: /:*?“”<>|&+=()[]{}$%. Do not use a space before or after the names. 470 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books Caution: A section name and a workbook description must be unique within a template A template can include one or several sections. Each section includes the selection of the fixed and variable dimension members. In the Book Publication Wizard, you will be able to select the section(s) of the template you want to publish. You can create a blank section or a section based on an existing one. You can also delete a section from the template. These actions are available in the template dialog box, under the section tab. Any dimension whose member is not specified in the rows and columns should be assigned as either Fixed Members or Variable Members. When Select Dimensions is chosen the Dimension Selector opens. You can also suppress members with no values. Figure 303: Dimension Selection One pdf will be created for each variable member selected. You must include all of the model's dimensions in either the report rows, columns, and axis. Report axis dimensions with single values should be selected as fixed members in the publication template. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 471
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Report axis dimensions with multiple values should be selected as variable members in the publication template. Below, you can see an example. Figure 304: Fixed and Variable Selections Note: A dimension can only be fixed or variable, not both. In the result set, the members are displayed according to the following precedence: 1. 2. 3. 4. Members selected in the row and column axis Members selected as fixed or variable Members in the page axis Members in the context The Excel template below is generated when the Book Publication template is saved. 472 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books Figure 305: Generated Template Note: Book templates are stored in the Books folder. The Book Publication Wizard To publish the workbooks, the Book Publication Wizard is used. You have two options: 1. 2. Publish Now Schedule the Publication In the next screen, select the output: 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 473
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Figure 306: Publication Format If you choose to print the books, you can use the following options: 1. Print one sheet for all dimensions member combinations. • • • 2. This option enables you to define the printing order This option is not checked by default For example, if a workbook contains two sheets and the variable members that you have selected in the template are: Spain and Italy, the printing will be performed in the following order: Sheet 1 - Spain, Sheet 1 - Italy, Sheet 2 - Spain, Sheet 2 - Italy. • If you do not select the option, the printing will be performed in the following order: Sheet 1 - Spain, Sheet 2 - Spain, Sheet 1 - Italy, Sheet 2 - Italy. Print sheets with no data • • This option enables you to specify that a sheet will be printed even if it does not contain any data This option is not checked by default If the Single PDF option is selected, you can name the file and choose Local Folder or Library destinations: Public, Private, Teams 474 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books Figure 307: Single PDF Options After Book Publication, the summary log is available for review. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 475
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Figure 308: Summary Log When you proceed to the publication step, the process log will be generated: 476 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books Figure 309: Process Log Book in PDF Format If you choose to export the books in PDF format, note that by default, one PDF file is generated for each combination of variable members. If you want to generate all the books in one single PDF, select the Single PDF option. You can then access the files from the Home tab of the web client in the Library section. Figure 310: Library 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 477
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 When the PDF is opened, the variable member's static data can be viewed via the drop down box. Figure 311: PDF Output Note: If the option Single PDF had been selected then you can page down to see each variable member's data. Below you can see an example where two dimensions are variable: Figure 312: Multiple Variable Dimensions 478 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books Security There are two task profiles for this feature. 1. 2. 2011 Edit Book and Distribution Templates - This permits a user to maintain the templates Publish Books and Delete Published Books - This permits a user to maintain published books © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 479
    • Unit 5: Web Integration 480 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books Exercise 17: Using Books Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and save a workbook to be published • Create a publication template • View the PDF output from the Library Business Example You need to do flash reporting on static data. Task 1: Prepare a template to publish input schedules for cost centers in the Support group. Use the BPC430_## Environment and the Expense Model 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 2. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description P_Account PL400 -Indirect Expenses P_Category Plan - Plan P_Cost MANUFACTURING - Manufacturing P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total Measures PERIODIC - Periodic 3. In the Expense Model, use drag and drop to build a report with P_Account in the rows and P_Time in the columns. 4. Display the P_Account base members for Indirect Expenses in the rows 5. Display the months for 2011 in the columns. 6. Place P_Category, P_Cost, P_Curr, and Measures in the Page Axis. Note: You may have to choose the EPM tab. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 481
    • Unit 5: Web Integration 7. BPC430 Save the template as Student_Report Task 2: Create the publication template. 1. Create your publication settings as shown below: Caution: If you do not have a blank workbook open, then create a new workbook. Figure 313: Books - Template Header 2. Select your dimensions as you see below Figure 314: Dimension Selection Continued on next page 482 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books 3. Make your fixed member selections as you see below: Figure 315: Fixed Selections 4. Select the base level members of support for the variable selections. Task 3: Run the publication wizard 1. Select the publication type - Publish Now. 2. Select the publication format - Publish to PDF Format. 3. Select your template and section. 4. Review the summary log. This displays the data selections. 5. Review the process log, this will show your successful publications. Task 4: View the Output. 1. 2. 2011 Go to the Library. Open the publication. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 483
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Solution 17: Using Books Task 1: Prepare a template to publish input schedules for cost centers in the Support group. Use the BPC430_## Environment and the Expense Model 1. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) In the Web Client Start Page select EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager opens after a few seconds. b) Select the Expense - BPC430_## connection. c) Choose OK. The EPM Pane appears on the right. d) 2. Choose the EPM tab. Set your context members as shown below: Dimension Member ID - Description P_Account PL400 -Indirect Expenses P_Category Plan - Plan P_Cost MANUFACTURING - Manufacturing P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total Measures PERIODIC - Periodic a) 3. Set your context selections as shown above. In the Expense Model, use drag and drop to build a report with P_Account in the rows and P_Time in the columns. a) From the EPM Pane drag the dimensions to the cells specified below. Dimension Cell P_Account A5 P_Time B4 Continued on next page 484 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books 4. Display the P_Account base members for Indirect Expenses in the rows a) b) Select Indirect Expenses by placing a checkbox to the left of the member. c) Under Selection Relationship choose Base Level. d) Click the right arrow button to move the selection to Selected Members . e) Similarly, click the left arrow button to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. f) Set the display to Description. g) 5. On the lower right, in the Row Axis, click on P_Account (in blue hypertext). Choose OK. Display the months for 2011 in the columns. a) On the lower right, in the Column Axis, click on P_Time (in blue hypertext) b) Select 2011.TOTAL by selecting the checkbox to the left of the member. c) Under Selection Relationship, choose Member and Children. d) Click the right arrow button to move the selection to Selected Members. e) Similarly, click the left arrow button to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. f) Set the display to Description. g) Choose OK. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 485
    • Unit 5: Web Integration 6. BPC430 Place P_Category, P_Cost, P_Curr, and Measures in the Page Axis. Note: You may have to choose the EPM tab. a) Choose Edit Report. b) Drag P_Category, P_Cost, P_Curr, and Measures to the Page Axis. c) Select OK. Your worksheet should appear as follows: Figure 316: Student Report 7. Save the template as Student_Report a) Choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder b) Choose Company(Public) → BOOKS c) In the File Name field enter: Student_Report d) Choose Save e) Choose the Office Button and Select Close Task 2: Create the publication template. 1. Create your publication settings as shown below: Continued on next page 486 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books Caution: If you do not have a blank workbook open, then create a new workbook. Figure 317: Books - Template Header a) b) Next to Template Name, enter Book_Template. c) Next to Section Name, enter Section1. d) Next to Report Workbook, select Student_Report by choosing the Ellipse button then Company(Public) → Books → highlight Student_Report then choose Open. e) 2. Choose Book Publication → New Template. Next to Workbook Description, enter Student_Report. Select your dimensions as you see below Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 487
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Figure 318: Dimension Selection a) b) Make your selections as you see above. c) 3. Choose Select Dimensions (blue hyperlink in the middle right) Choose OK. Make your fixed member selections as you see below: Figure 319: Fixed Selections a) 4. Confirm your Fixed Member assignments as shown above. Select the base level members of support for the variable selections. a) Next to P_COST choose the ellipse icon. The EPM - Member Selector opens. b) 488 Select Support by placing a checkbox to the left of the member. Continued on next page © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books c) Under Selection Relationship choose Base Level. d) Click the right arrow button to move the selection to Selected Members. e) Similarly, click the left arrow button to remove the prior selection which is already highlighted. f) Choose OK. You may receive a message Some members have been modified so that the template can be used, choose OK. Hint: You may need to maximize your screen for the next step. g) Choose Save. The excel sheet is generated and a save dialogue box pops up. h) Enter the File Name Book_Template. i) Choose Save. An error may occur. If so, choose OK. The workbook below will be saved and then close. Here is what you saved. Figure 320: Generated Template Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 489
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Task 3: Run the publication wizard 1. Select the publication type - Publish Now. a) b) 2. Choose Book Publication → Publish Books. Select Publish Now→ Next. Select the publication format - Publish to PDF Format. a) b) 3. Select Publish to PDF Format. Choose Next. Select your template and section. a) Select Book_Template. Note: When Book_Template is selected, the system will validate the template for a few seconds. b) Select Section1. Continued on next page 490 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books 4. Review the summary log. This displays the data selections. a) Choose Next After a few seconds, you will see a summary log. Figure 321: Summary Log Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 491
    • Unit 5: Web Integration 5. BPC430 Review the process log, this will show your successful publications. a) Choose Next. The process log appears in a few seconds: Figure 322: Process Log b) When the process is completed, choose Finish. Task 4: View the Output. 1. Go to the Library. a) Choose the Home tab in the web client. b) Choose Libary→ Public. Continued on next page 492 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Publishing Books 2. Open the publication. a) Choose Book_Template. A web session opens. b) From the dropdown, choose Admin and then choose → Display. The results for the Admin cost center is displayed. Figure 323: PDF Output c) 2011 Close the web session. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 493
    • Unit 5: Web Integration BPC430 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create Book Publication templates • Print workbooks • Publish to PDF 494 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Unit Summary Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the Home tab • Use the built-in screens • Use the Library and Workspaces to organize your reports • Explain functionality differences in the web and Excel clients • Set your context defaults • Create web reports • Create input forms • Create workspaces • Create Book Publication templates • Print workbooks • Publish to PDF 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 495
    • Unit Summary 496 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • Unit Summary 497 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit Summary 498 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit 6 Drill Through Unit Overview This Unit covers Drill Through Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • Configure drill through for a website Configure drill through for a BW Query Configure drill through for ECC Unit Contents Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites .................... 500 Procedure: How to Drill Through to ECC.................................... 513 Exercise 18: Configuring the URL Based Drill Through ................... 517 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 499
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn to configure and use drill through. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • Configure drill through for a website Configure drill through for a BW Query Configure drill through for ECC Business Example Your business users need to access related information in web sites, BW tables, and ECC. Overview In this section, you will learn about the business reasons to use drill through. The drill-through feature enables you to view information on source data that makes up the content of a selected cell in a report in Microsoft Office Excel. Drill-through definitions are set up in administration. First of all, since there a lot of different words people use for this and related features, lets's start by discussing the difference between two of the most common phrases drill down and drill through. • Drill Down - performs an expansion of a parent member. For example, you drill down from 2011.TOTAL to quarters in 2011. • Drill Through - jumps the user to another system and performs a look up based on which cell the user's cursor is in. For example, you want to drill through and access the cost centers for the company that you are viewing. 500 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Drill Through Options SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, version for the ... Data Sources Available for Drill Through NetWeaver Platform Web sites BW Query ECC - ERP Central Component • • • Web sites BW Query ECC - ERP Central Component • • Microsoft Platform • • • External database Journal detail table You will find some very detailed help on the External database and Journal detail table at HELP.SAP.COM. In the web site, follow this path: SAP BusinessObjects → EPM Solutions → Planning and Consolidation → SAP BusinessObjects EPM Solutions, add-in for Microsoft Office 10.0 Here are a few of the reasons to use drill through. • • • • • Access related documents in a web site Jump from summary to detailed data Access original transactions Give users an easy way to access data in ECC Access data not stored in Planning and Consolidation Below, you can see a graphical depiction of the three URL-based options. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 501
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Figure 324: Drill through – URL-Based Options Drill Through to a Webset Drill throughs are created by model in administration. After you set up at least one drill through for a model, it is available to users of reports that reference that model. In administration, your will find the drill through configuration area in Features. In the example below, there are three drill throughs set up. Figure 325: Drill through – In Administration 502 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites In the example below, a drill through to the Bing web site has been set up. Note: Users will see the description of the drill through in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. Figure 326: Drill through – URL Parameters Hint: You can switch the order of the columns in the drill through definition screen. Below, you can see the definitions of the individual fields: Drill Through Settings Field ID The technical name of the drill through definition Description The description of the drill through Target URL The url of the web site ... Drill can be launched from Model 2011 Definition The Model for which the drill through will be used © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 503
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Parameter The values will vary based on the type of drill through. A web site such as Bing for example takes a q and that is used to pass a filter value to the web site. Dimension or User Defined Value Select a dimension or leave it set to User Defined Value Property or Value If dimension was selected above, the ID and the properties of the dimensions are available to select from, otherwise enter in a User Defined Value When the user performs a drill-through in a report, the filter value is taken from the selected data cell. And if you selected the ID of a dimension, the member IDs are used to look up values in the web site for example. If you select a property of a dimension, that property value is mapped. Therefore, you can send either the dimension member ID or the value of a property as a filter criteria. When you map a parameter to a user-defined value, you can hard code a value If you specify a user-defined value in the mapping, when the user performs a drill-through in a report, the parameter value is based on the user-specified value. In the example below, the users cursor is on Operating Costs. Figure 327: Drill through – Launch URL from Excel As long as at least one drill through is created for the model, the user will have a drill through option in their EPM ribbon. 504 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Figure 328: Drill Through to URL Based on the parameters and where the users curser is, a parameter is passed to the website. Figure 329: Drill through – URL Result Drill Through to ECC ECC Drill Through In the following ECC scenario, we have loaded data from ECC however the entity and account members have been converted during the import. Therefore, you will use an entity property called company_code to map Admin for example to its related company code in ECC such as 1000. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 505
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Figure 330: Drill Through – ECC Entity Mapping Just like we did for the entity dimension, we are mapping the dimension member Third Party Sales to a GL Account in ECC. Figure 331: Drill through – ECC Account Mapping The ECC parameters below are using the ECC field names such as RACCT, RYEAR, and RBUKRS (company code) as parameters. The ECC screen that you will jump to is controlled by an ok code called ONLI. The property and value settings are using properties for entity, account, and the time dimension. Note: The number of dimensions required will depend on which ECC screen you are drilling through to. 506 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Below you can see an example of the parameters needed for the ECC drill through. Figure 332: Drill Through –- ECC General Settings The parameters are performing the following functions: • • • • R_ACCT-LOW - this will receive the ID of P_Account in the Excel report R_BUKRS-LOW - this will receive the ID of P_Cost in the Excel report RYEAR - this will receive the YEAR property value of P_Time in the Excel report ~okcode - the ~ executes the program for the screen specific transaction code ONLI Note: You can access the ECC URL from your basis support team. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 507
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 The URL includes the following: • • • • • • • Http://w37tdc00.wdf.sap.corp:55080 - this will vary by customer SAP/bc/gui/sap/its/webgui - this will be the same for everyone Language - this will be the language used when jumping to ECC The ECC Client ### - the productive client The transaction code - in this example, faglb03 was used The drill through join parameters - in this case rbukrs-low and racct-low Ok code - this is a screen specific command Note: & denotes a join. Figure 333: Drill Through – ECC Launch from Excel Note how the system passed the correct filter value for account, time, and company code in the result below. 508 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Figure 334: Drill Through – ECC Result: Balance Once you are in the balance screen you can double click to see the line items. Figure 335: Drill Through – ECC Result: Line Items Accounting documents in ECC are created for every financial transaction and are a valuable piece of the audit trail. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 509
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Figure 336: Drill Through – ECC Result: Data Entry View The header of a document displays the user name and date for example. Figure 337: Drill Through – ECC Result: Header There is a restriction to keep in mind for the ECC drill throughs. If the ECC target has a pop-up that prompts the user for an organizational assignment for example, drill through will not work. 510 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Figure 338: Drill Through – Restriction (ECC) These the prerequisites to drill through to ECC: • • • • ERP transactions can be accessed from a URL through the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) For ITS 6.20 standalone with R/3 Enterprise 4.7 for example, the URL would be:http://ITS_HOST:ITS_PORT/scripts/wgate/webgui/!? saplanguage=ENsapclient=800&~transaction=[parameters]&~OKCODE=[ONLI] For SAP NetWeaver 2004 or higher with integrated ITS the URL would be: http://WAS_HOST:WAS_PORT/sap/bc/gui/sap/its/webgui? sap-language=EN=800&~transaction=[parameters]&~OKCODE=[ONLI] Example: FAGLB03 G/L Balances Display: http://tsphl815.phl.sap.corp:8002/sap/bc/gui/sap/its/webgui?sap-language=EN=sapclient800&~transaction=FAGLB03=racct-low=199990=rbukrs-low=1000=2006&~okcode=ONLI Follow these instructions to look up the field names and ok codes you need in ECC. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 511
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Figure 339: How to Look Up ECC ok codes 512 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites How to Drill Through to ECC 1. Look up the field names and okcode in ECC for the target transaction code. In your target transaction code in ECC use the tab key to position your curser on the execute or enter icon. Choose F1 → Technical Help and note the okcode. Position your curser in the join fields → choose F1→ Technical Help. Note the field names. Contact your basis administrator for ECC for the URL. You now have the metadata to configure this in Planning and Consolidation 2. Create the drill through definition In Administration go to Features → Drill Through. Choose Add. Enter the General Parameters including the ECC URL. Under Parameter Mapping, choose Add. Enter the parameters for your ECC drill down scenario. Choose Test Query and enter in values for the fields you specified above. Choose OK. You should be prompted to log in to ECC and then you should be in the transaction code you specified for the filter values you selected. Drill Through to a BW Query BW Drill Through 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 513
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 To carry out a drill through to a BW Query, you need a url and the query name to get started. Note: The query below is created on a BPC Infocube in this example. That's why the property/value /cpmb/podyizg is being used. If we drilled through to a standard BW Infocube, that parameter could be 0comp_code for example. Note: It is possible to drill down from a group account in BPC to a BW query on an infocube with GL accounts. The GL accounts can be modeled in BW with group account as a navigational attribute and that way the user can look at a group (summary) account in BPC but then drill through to a BW and look at the detail by GL Account. Below you can see a sample drill through definition for a BW query. Figure 340: Drill Through – BW Parameters The parameters above are performing the following functions: • • • • • 514 QUERY - this is the technical name of the query, for example: BPC430_QUERY FILTER_IOBJNM_1 - this is the first characteristic, for example: CPMB/PODYIZG is being used to provide a filter value FILTER_VALUE_1 - this identifies the dimension, for example: P_COST is being as a filter based on its ID FILTER_IOBJNM_2 - this is the second characteristic, for example CPMB/PODYS8N is being used to provide a filter value FILTER_VALUE_2 - this identifies the dimension P_TIME is being as a filter based on its ID © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Again, based on where the users curser is, that data intersection will be passed to the query. Figure 341: Drill Through – Launch BW from Excel In the result below, you can see that the data is filtered for Admin and 2011.01. Note: The query definition is filtered to LC and Plan. Figure 342: Drill Through – BW Result 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 515
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Security There are three drill through task profiles: 1. 2. 3. 516 Manage Drill Throughs - this allows a user to maintain drill through parameters View Drill Throughs - this allows a user to view drill through parameters Run Drill Throughs - this allows a user to run a drill through © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Exercise 18: Configuring the URL Based Drill Through Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and test the web site drill through • Create and test the BW Query drill through Business Example While working in the Excel interface, users typically need to access related data. So, they may need to perform a filtered jump to a website, related BW Query to look at general ledger details for example that don't exist in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. Task 1: Create a Web Site Drill Through Configure the web site drill through to http:/www.BING.COM in administration and use it in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 1. Open Administration for your BPC430_## Environment. 2. Go to the Drill Through screen. 3. Configure the website drill through in Administration for your BPC430_## Environment and Expense Model as you see below: Use a parameter value of q for the dimension P_Cost ID as the filter criteria. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 517
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Figure 343: Drill through – URL Parameters 4. Test the drill through from Administration. 5. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 6. Set your context members as shown below and open the Dynamic Report With Subtotals - Accounts. Dimension P_Account PL400 - Indirect Expenses P_Category PLAN - Plan P_Cost DIRECT - Direct P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total Measures 7. Member ID - Description PERIODIC - Periodic Test the web-based drill through in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. Continued on next page 518 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Task 2: BW Query Drill Through Configure the BW Query drill through in Administration and use it in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 1. Open the Drill Through Parameters in your BPC430_## folder. 2. Go to the Drill Through screen in Administration for your BPC430_## Environment. 3. Configure the web site drill through in Administration for your BPC430_## Environment and Expense Model as you see below: Figure 344: Drill Through – BW Parameters 4. Test the drill through from Administration. 5. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 6. Set your context members as shown below and open the Dynamic Report With Drill in Place. Dimension P_Account PLAN - Plan P_Cost TOTAL - Total P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total Measures 2011 PL400 - Indirect Expenses P_Category 7. Member ID - Description PERIODIC - Periodic Test the web based drill through in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 519
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Solution 18: Configuring the URL Based Drill Through Task 1: Create a Web Site Drill Through Configure the web site drill through to http:/www.BING.COM in administration and use it in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 1. Open Administration for your BPC430_## Environment. a) On the web client Home tab, choose the Start Page and click Planning and Consolidation Administration The Administration tab is created. 2. Go to the Drill Through screen. a) Choose Features → Drill Through. An Empty Drill Through screen is displayed. 3. Configure the website drill through in Administration for your BPC430_## Environment and Expense Model as you see below: Use a parameter value of q for the dimension P_Cost ID as the filter criteria. Continued on next page 520 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Figure 345: Drill through – URL Parameters a) b) Enter in the General Settings as seen above. c) Under Parameter Mapping choose Add. d) 4. Choose New. Enter your parameters as shown above. Test the drill through from Administration. a) Choose Test Query. b) Under Property or Value enter Consulting. c) Choose OK. The Bing web site is launched for Consulting. d) Close the Bing web session. e) Choose Save. You are in the Administration tab on the Drill Through screen. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 521
    • Unit 6: Drill Through 5. BPC430 Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) In the Web Client Start Page select EPM Office Add-in Excel. Hint: If you are already connected to the Expense model in the Excel client, you should log off and log back on. The EPM - Connection Manager opens after a few seconds. b) Select the Expense - BPC430_## connection. c) Choose OK. The EPM Pane appears on the right. 6. Set your context members as shown below and open the Dynamic Report With Subtotals - Accounts. Dimension Member ID - Description P_Account PL400 - Indirect Expenses P_Category PLAN - Plan P_Cost DIRECT - Direct P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total Measures PERIODIC - Periodic a) Set your context selections as shown above. Hint: If you do not see the EPM Context create a blank workbook. b) In the EPM ribbon, select Open → Open server root folder. c) On the left side of the dialog box, choose Company(Public) Reports → Templates d) Select the Dynamic Report With Hierarchy - Entities → Open e) Choose Refresh Continued on next page 522 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites 7. Test the web-based drill through in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) Click in the intersection of 2011.Q1 and Consulting. b) From the EPM tab → Choose Drill Through → Bing. Figure 346: Drill Through to URL The Bing web site is launched for Consulting. c) Close the web session. d) Close Excel. Task 2: BW Query Drill Through Configure the BW Query drill through in Administration and use it in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 1. Open the Drill Through Parameters in your BPC430_## folder. a) b) Open the Drill Through Parameters file. c) 2. Go to Start → My Documents → My Documents → BPC430 → BPC430_##.. Copy the BW Query URL. Go to the Drill Through screen in Administration for your BPC430_## Environment. a) b) 3. On the web client Home tab, choose the Start Page and click Planning and Consolidation Administration Choose Features → Drill Through Configure the web site drill through in Administration for your BPC430_## Environment and Expense Model as you see below: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 523
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Figure 347: Drill Through – BW Parameters a) Under Drill Through, choose New . b) Enter in the ID and Description as seen above. c) Paste in the Target URL. d) Under Parameter Mapping choose Add for each parameter. e) Enter your parameters as shown above. Note: Please copy and paste the Values for the FILTER_IOBJNM_#'s from the word document. Continued on next page 524 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites 4. Test the drill through from Administration. a) Choose Test Query. b) Under Property or Value enter: Dimension P_COST ADMIN P_TIME c) Value 2011.01 Choose OK. The BW Query is executed for your selections. Figure 348: Drill Through – BW Result d) e) 5. Close the web session. Choose Save→ Close. Open the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) In the Web Client Start Page select EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager opens after a few seconds. b) Select the Expense - BPC430_## connection. c) Choose OK. The EPM Pane appears on the right. 6. Set your context members as shown below and open the Dynamic Report With Drill in Place. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 525
    • Unit 6: Drill Through BPC430 Dimension Member ID - Description P_Account PL400 - Indirect Expenses P_Category PLAN - Plan P_Cost TOTAL - Total P_Curr LC - Local Currency P_Time 2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total Measures PERIODIC - Periodic a) Set your context selections as shown above. b) In the EPM ribbon, select Open → Open server root folder: c) On the left side of the dialog box, choose Company(Public) → Reports → Templates d) Select the Dynamic Report With Drill in Place → Open e) Choose Refresh. f) Double click on Support. Support is expanded to its children. g) Double click on 2011.Q1 You can see the first three months of the year 7. Test the web based drill through in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. a) Click in the intersection of 2011.01 and Admin. b) From the EPM tab → Choose Drill Through → BW Query You can see that your filter criteria was passed to the query. P_COST is set to ADMIN and P_TIME is set to 2011.01. c) Close the web session.
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Drill Through for BW, ECC, and Websites Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Configure drill through for a website • Configure drill through for a BW Query • Configure drill through for ECC 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 527
    • Unit Summary BPC430 Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Configure drill through for a website • Configure drill through for a BW Query • Configure drill through for ECC 528 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • Unit Summary 529 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit Summary 530 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit 7 Word and Powerpoint Unit Overview This unit covers the EPM add-in for Word and PowerPoint. Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • Describe the EPM add-in for Word and PowerPoint Insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft Word file Insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft PowerPoint file. Unit Contents Lesson: Using Word and PowerPoint ............................................ 532 Procedure: Copy an Excel Report into Word or PowerPoint ............. 536 Exercise 19: Creating reports with the EPM add-in for Word and Powerpoint....................................................................... 537 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 531
    • Unit 7: Word and Powerpoint BPC430 Lesson: Using Word and PowerPoint Lesson Overview Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • Describe the EPM add-in for Word and PowerPoint Insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft Word file Insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft PowerPoint file. Business Example You have been asked to create reports using the Word and PowerPoint interfaces. Creating Reports in the EPM add-in for Microsoft Word and PowerPoint The EPM add-ins for Microsoft Word and PowerPoint perform many of the same features as the EPM add-in for Microsoft Office Excel. Figure 349: Opening the EPM add-ins 532 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Word and PowerPoint The EPM add-in for Microsoft Office and PowerPoint can be opened from the Web Client or from Start → Programs → Microsoft Office menu path. • • • • • • Log on and Connections Open and Save Actions EPM Report Editor EPM Context and EPM Pane Comments Flash Object insertion The features listed above have the same functionality as when using the EPM add-in for Microsoft Excel. Figure 350: The EPM add-in Ribbon The EPM add-in for Word has an item to configure the Document Options. For PowerPoint this is called Presentation Options. (In Excel this was called Sheet Options. However, as is the case with Excel, not all of the features are available for Word and PowerPoint. • • • • • • 2011 Totals Placement Empty Row and Column behavior Auto Fit Column Width Repeat Row and Column Headers Number Format Refresh Options © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 533
    • Unit 7: Word and Powerpoint BPC430 When you open the Options, the options noted above are available. Those that are greyed out are not available for Word and PowerPoint. The Number Format option enables you to enter how you want the data numbers to be displayed, including a thousands separator and a decimal number. The default format is 0.## (No separator and 2 decimal places.) Figure 351: Insert Data Point An additional feature for Word and PowerPoint is the option to insert a data point (one value.) This can be inserted for the context dimension members, for a specified set of dimension members, or combination of the two. If you do not specify a member for all the dimensions of the cube or model, the context members will be inherited from the EPM Context. 534 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Word and PowerPoint Figure 352: Formatting for Word and PowerPoint 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 535
    • Unit 7: Word and Powerpoint BPC430 Copy an Excel Report into Word or PowerPoint 1. 2. Open Word or PowerPoint. 3. In the EPM add-in Ribbon, choose Log On. 4. Choose the Ellipsis button, and select the Connection you were using in Excel. 5. Go back to Excel, and place your cursor anywhere within the report. 6. From the EPM ribbon, choose Report Actions → Copy report 7. 536 Create a report in the EPM add-in for Excel Switch back to Word or PowerPoint and choose Report Actions → Paste Report © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Word and PowerPoint Exercise 19: Creating reports with the EPM add-in for Word and Powerpoint Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Learn how to use the EPM add-in for Word and Powerpoint. Business Example There are business users who would like to see reports in Word and Powerpoint. Task 1: Use Word to create a report. 1. Access the EPM add-in for Word. 2. Create a connection to the Sales Model for your assigned Environment and make sure your EPM Context bar and EPM Pane are displayed. (Or if you have connected in previous exercises, choose the existing connection) 3. Ensure that your Active Connection is SALES - BPC430_## 4. Create a report with the Product and P_Acct dimension in the Row Axis and Time in the Column Axis. 5. Set your EPM Context. 6. Format the fill in the blanks with zeros and change for the numbers to include thousand separators. 7. Close the report without saving. Task 2: Use PowerPoint to Insert some data points. 1. Open PowerPoint and Logon to the EPM add-in 2. Set your EPM Context. 3. In the PowerPoint Presentation, type The Dog Product Sales in 2009 were 4. Insert a data point. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 537
    • Unit 7: Word and Powerpoint BPC430 5. 6. In the PowerPoint Presentation type The Cat Product Sales in 2009 were 7. Insert another data point for all cat products. 8. Move your data point 9. 538 Move your data point. Format the results according to your preference. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Word and PowerPoint Solution 19: Creating reports with the EPM add-in for Word and Powerpoint Task 1: Use Word to create a report. 1. Access the EPM add-in for Word. a) From the Remote Desktop: Start → Programs → Microsoft Office → Microsoft Office Word 2007. Microsoft Word will open 2. Create a connection to the Sales Model for your assigned Environment and make sure your EPM Context bar and EPM Pane are displayed. (Or if you have connected in previous exercises, choose the existing connection) a) Choose the EPM tab → Log On. The EPM - Logon window is displayed. b) To the right of the Connection field, choose the Ellipses (...) button. The EPM - Connection Manager window opens c) If you have the SALES - BPC430_## connection, choose it and then choose OK. Move to Step 3. If not, choose the Create button The Create Connection window appears d) In the Server URL field, type: http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes) as shown below. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 539
    • Unit 7: Word and Powerpoint BPC430 Figure 353: Create Connection e) Choose Connect f) Enter your user id and password to create the connection User ID BPC-## g) Password training Choose Logon Environments and Models are loaded h) Use the dropdown to select your Environment and Model Environment Your assigned Environment i) Model Sales Choose Generate Connection Name The system will generate a connection name made up of the Model ID Environment ID Continued on next page 540 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Word and PowerPoint j) Click OK twice k) If you are prompted, logon again with your user and password. l) From the EPM Ribbon choose Options → User Options The EPM - User Options window opens m) n) 3. Choose the Others tab. In the bottom right, make sure the checkboxes Display EPM Context Bar and Display EPM Pane are selected. Choose OK Ensure that your Active Connection is SALES - BPC430_## a) 4. In the EPM Pane make sure the Active Connection is set to SALES BPC430_##. If not, choose it from the dropdown. Create a report with the Product and P_Acct dimension in the Row Axis and Time in the Column Axis. a) From the EPM Pane right mouse click on the PRODUCT dimension and choose Move to Row Axis b) Right mouse click on the P_ACCT dimension and choose Move to Row Axis. c) Right mouse click on the TIME dimension and choose Move to Column Axis. The Report is executed. 5. Set your EPM Context. a) Set your EPM Context to the following: Dimension Member ID - Description CATEGORY Actual - Actual from GL ENTITY STORE1 - Store1 PRODUCT DOGACTIVECAN - High Energy Food for Active Dogs P_ACCT CE0004000 - Personal Costs RPTCURRENCY LC - Local Currency Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 541
    • Unit 7: Word and Powerpoint BPC430 TIME 2009.Q1 - Q1 2009 MEASURES PERIODIC - Periodic Hint: You may have to scroll down to see the Measures dimension. b) From the EPM tab, choose Refresh Your report is refreshed with your new context members. 6. Format the fill in the blanks with zeros and change for the numbers to include thousand separators. a) From the EPM Ribbon, choose Options → Document Options The EPM - Document Options window opens b) On the Formatting tab do the following: • • • Choose the checkbox Set Default Value in Empty Cell Change the Empty Cell Default Value to 0,000. Change the Number Format to 0,000 Then choose OK c) From the EPM Ribbon choose the Refresh button Figure 354: Results - Numbers may differ Continued on next page 542 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Word and PowerPoint 7. Close the report without saving. a) From the Office button, choose Close. The Microsoft Office Word window appears. b) When prompted with Do you want to save choose No. Task 2: Use PowerPoint to Insert some data points. 1. Open PowerPoint and Logon to the EPM add-in a) From the Remote Desktop Connection choose Start → Programs → Microsoft Office → Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2007. b) Choose the EPM add-in ribbon and choose Log On. The EPM - Logon window opens. c) To the right of the Connection field, choose the Ellipses (...) button. The EPM - Connection Manager window opens d) Choose your Sales Connection from the Word task and choose OK The EPM - Logon window opens e) 2. Enter your user id and password and choose Logon Set your EPM Context. a) Set your EPM Context to the following: Dimension Member ID - Description CATEGORY Actual - Actual from GL ENTITY CONSTORE_TYPE PRODUCT DOG - All Dog Products P_ACCT EXTSALES - External Sales RPTCURRENCY LC - Local Currency TIME 2009.TOTAL - TOTAL - 2009 MEASURES PERIODIC - Periodic Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 543
    • Unit 7: Word and Powerpoint 3. BPC430 In the PowerPoint Presentation, type The Dog Product Sales in 2009 were a) b) In Excel, choose the Insert tab, then insert a Text Box by choosing Text Box and then drawing a text box in the PowerPoint. c) 4. Delete the title and subtitle text boxes in the presentation. In that text box, enter the text noted above. Insert a data point. a) Choose the EPM tab, then from the EPM Ribbon choose the Insert Data button. b) Since our EPM Context represents what we want, just choose OK. A data point called #RFR is generated. c) 5. Move your data point. a) 6. From the EPM Ribbon choose Refresh Click once on the data point, then drag and drop to the right of the text you just typed. In the PowerPoint Presentation type The Cat Product Sales in 2009 were a) b) 7. In Excel, choose the Insert tab, then insert a Text Box by choosing Text Box and then drawing a text box in the PowerPoint. Enter the text noted above. Insert another data point for all cat products. a) b) Under the Dimensions area choose the Product dimension and under the Members area choose All Cat Products (You may have to open the Pet Type Consolidation hierarchy) c) Choose OK. d) 8. Choose the EPM tab, and from the EPM Ribbon choose the Insert Data button. From the EPM Ribbon choose Refresh. Move your data point a) Click once on the data point, then drag and drop to the right of the text your just typed. Continued on next page 544 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: Using Word and PowerPoint 9. Format the results according to your preference. a) Highlight the different boxes and format the font. b) From the EPM add-in Ribbon choose Options → Presentation Options The EPM - Presentation Options window opens. c) Choose the Formatting tab and type 0,000 in Number Format field. d) Choose OK e) From the EPM Ribbon choose Refresh Figure 355: Results - numbers and format may vary 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 545
    • Unit 7: Word and Powerpoint BPC430 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the EPM add-in for Word and PowerPoint • Insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft Word file • Insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft PowerPoint file. 546 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Unit Summary Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the EPM add-in for Word and PowerPoint • Insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft Word file • Insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft PowerPoint file. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 547
    • Unit Summary 548 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012
    • Unit Summary 549 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit Summary 550 BPC430 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • Unit 8 Dashboards Unit Overview This unit covers creating Dashboards. Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • Describe the key features of an SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Create a new dashboard Use the EPM Connector Unit Contents Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration ........................ 552 Procedure: How to Connect when using Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP Microsoft platform ........................................... 572 Exercise 20: Create a Dashboard with Live Planning and Consolidation Data .............................................................................. 573 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 551
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Lesson Overview This lesson covers the key integration points of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation as well as the key benefits of the integration. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • Describe the key features of an SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Create a new dashboard Use the EPM Connector Business Example You have business users who want to incorporate SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation data into their management dashboards. SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards In this section, you will learn how to leverage Dashboards to read and write SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation data. SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards is data visualization software that enables users to create dynamic and interactive models that can be added to dashboards or exported for delivery in a variety of formats such as PowerPoint, Flash, PDF, AIR, Outlook, and the web (using HTML). These models retain their full interactivity and require only Adobe Flash Player to run. The Dashboard Designer and Microsoft Excel are required only during the design Phase. You can configure your model to work with live data updates from external sources, such as XML, Portals, Web Services, SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise (LiveOffice and Query as a Web Service), and SAP Business Explorer Queries. The software includes a fully-functioning Excel spreadsheet. Data and formulas can be imported or entered directly into the embedded spreadsheet and then modified, as required, without re-importing the spreadsheet. Here are some of the key features. 552 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 356: Key Features These are the main prerequisites to use SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards • • • The EPM Connector Add-On The BPC Data Grid Add-On The model must be set to Use as Source of Data Note: The system then generates a virtual infoprovider and a transient query which will be used as the connection mechanism. In administration, the model must be set to Use as Source of Data. Figure 357: Model - Use as Source of Data Setting 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 553
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Here are few of the other requirements for Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP NetWeaver platform. • To run the dashboard based on flash files: • – Adobe Flash Player installed on client PCs To build the dashboard: • – SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design – SAP EPM Add-In for Microsoft Excel – SAP BW OLE DB Provider To run the dashboard outside of BPC web client (standalone or in Excel) – • The Cross domain file must be created at http(s)://server:port/sap/crossdomain.xml – Details can be found in the EPM Office Add-Ins Master Guide XMLA service in ICF must be activated – – 554 /sap/bw/xml/soap/xmla/ node can be activated via Transaction SICF Details can be found in the SBOP PC 10.0 Installation Guide © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Here are the server configuration requirements for Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP Microsoft platform • Configure XMLA Provider from the SBOP PC installed folder – – – – • Choose Web XMLA → WebSrvr Choose Edit Datasource.xml Check or modify the server name in the blow xml tag: DataSourceInfo Data Source=servername /DataSourceInfo Restart the .Net Server Note: The XMLA allows the end user to receive a .swf flash file and to retrieve live data without the need for an SBOP PC installation. Configure the three Flash, crossdomain.xml files – Websrvr Note: Under Websrvr, the crossdomain.xml file should look like this: cross-domain-policy site-control permitted-cross-domain-policies=“all” / /cross-domain-polilcy – Websrvr→ Web Note: Under Websrvr → Web and Web xmla, the crossdomain.xml file should look like this: cross-domain-policy allow-http-request-headers-from domain=“*” headers=“*” secure=“false” / allow-access-from domain=“*” secure=“*” / /cross-domain-polilcy – Websrvr→ xmla Note: To enable flash files to connect to SBOP PC XMLA provider, or SBOP PC web services, these three crossdomain.xml files are installed. You should never delete the crossdomain.xml files You configure these files in the .net server in the installed folder. Note: For more information on this server configuration, see the installation guide and/or master guide In the Dashboard Designer, you can access the Add - On Manager via File → Manage Add-Ons. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 555
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 358: Add-On Manager The Dashboard Designer features a user-friendly user interface including drag and drop of the components. The Excel interface appears below the canvas. The EPM tab is where you create design time connections and build reports. To design a visual model of your data, you simply place components onto the canvas and link them to the data in the spreadsheet. SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards includes a wide range of components, such as dials, gauges, charts, maps, picklists, sliders. You can configure these components to display data directly from the spreadsheet, to write data to the spreadsheet so it can be used by other components, or to accept data entered by users when the model is running. 556 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 359: The Dashboard Designer To read data from the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in, you must create a design time connection which will be used to access data during the construction of the dashboard. In the example below, the Application Server, System Number and Client all relate to the underlying BW Server. Figure 360: Create a New OLE DB Data Source To access data from SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, you must create a Local connection for the $INFOCUBE multidimensional data source and the SAP BW DB OLE Provider OLAP Provider. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 557
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 The data in the cube/model is accessed via the transient query generated for models that are set as an ODBO Provider. Note: The letters TQ in the connection below stand for Transient Query. The naming convention for the transient query is /CPMB/TQ2_MPBRF2X for example. The associated infocube name in this example would be /CPMB/MPIRF2X, and the virtual InfoCube name would be /CPMB/MPBRF2X, Note that the letter I (in the 9th position) is replaced with the letter B. The connection name shown below is system generated. You can also input your own ID. Figure 361: Edit Connection Once connected, you can create a report just like the one below. 558 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration The EPM - Report Editor when used in the Dashboard Designer has the following unique features: • • • Each dimension with a hierarchy shows a PARENTH# selection item. The Measures dimension does not appear. Key Figures shows under dimensions and is used to select PERIODIC for example. Note: Filter selections do not appear in the EPM - Report Editor. Figure 362: The EPM Report With Dimensions After the report is created and executed, the output appears as follows in this example. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 559
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 363: The Data In Excel To use the EPM Connector, the report definition is made available in the excel sheet. Figure 364: Get Report Definition The EPM Connector allows you to interact with SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation while viewing a dashboard. EPM Connections are created via Data → Connections. 560 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 365: Make Your Dashboards Dynamic With the EPM Connector The steps to configure the EPM Connector are shown below. Figure 366: Configure the EPM Connector The table below includes the application and operation options when defining an EPM Connection. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 561
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 EPM Connection Application and Operation Options Name Name of the connection Application Select from the following list: • • • • • Operation • • • • • • • • • Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP NetWeaver platform Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP Microsoft platform Financial Consolidation BW Cube Financial Consolidation SASS Cube Profitability and Cost Management EPM Report - used to read data Retrieve Environments - used to return a list of environments Retrieve Models - used to return a list of models Retrieve Dimensions - used to return a list of dimensions Retrieve Dimension Members - used to return a list of dimension members Input Data- used to read and write data Retrieve Context - used to read the users context Retrieve Member Property Values - used to read a members properties Retrieve Text From Library - used to access a document from the Library The table below includes the fields that are seen for the EPM Report operation. Depending on which operation you select, the fields will vary. EPM Report - Input and Output Details Input Details This includes the following six fields in this example. It collapses when Output Details is expanded. • • • 562 Report Definition - Add the cell for report definition Report Name - This will be added by the system after the report definition is linked Environment - This will be added by the system after the report definition is linked © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration • • • Output Details Models - This will be added by the system after the report definition is linked Axis - Use these buttons to display the members in the rows and columns Dynamic Filters - Use members in a referenced cell as filter values This includes the following four fields in this example. It collapses when Input Details is expanded. • • • • Result - The cells which contain the report output is listed here Message - The cell where messages should be output Refresh on Load - Select to have the data refreshed when opening Refresh Every - Select to trigger a refresh every x seconds Dashboards can be exported as SWF files and viewed in the web. Note: When the user selects Refresh they will need to log in. See the example below: 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 563
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 367: View From the Web Dashboards can also be uploaded into the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Library. The dashboard can be uploaded as either a SWF file. Note: If available, the XLF file should be included but is not required. 564 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 368: Library Upload Selections If selected, the Edit After Upload feature allows you to: • • • Preview the dashboard Change the name, type, or variable format Add a variable If you select Edit After Upload the following screen appears. Hint: The Refresh button works in preview mode! 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 565
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 369: Edit After Upload When the dashboard is chosen from the Library a separate tab is generated. 566 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 370: Viewing a Dashboard In the Web Client SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards can also be used to input small amounts of data back to Planning and Consolidation. When creating the connection, choose the Input Data operation, then specify the base level members for each dimension. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 567
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 371: Configure the Cell Values to Allow Data Input The Input Data connection can only be configured for exactly one cell of the report. If you have multiple cells to update, you must create a connection for each cell. Every dimension must be assigned a base level member. An alternative would be to create member list boxes for each dimension, and have the end user select the members at runtime. Still, the end user can only update one cell at a time. 568 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 372: Binding to Allow Data Input You can use a push button to submit the data. 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 569
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 373: Use a Button to Submit Data Below you can see an example of a BPC Data Grid being used for viewing and inputting data. 570 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 374: Data Input Example 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 571
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 How to Connect when using Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP Microsoft platform 1. Open the Dashboard Designer and choose Blank Model. 2. In the EPM tab, choose Log On. 3. Next to the Connection field, choose the ellipse button. 4. In the EPM - Connection Manager choose Create. 5. Select Local. 6. Select SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. 7. Enter the Application Server host name. 8. Select Enterprise BOE Authentication for PC MS. 9. Choose Next and log on. 10. Select your Environment and choose Finish. 11. Select the Model and choose OK. You are back in the EPM - Connection Manager. 12. Choose OK. You are back in the EPM tab. 13. Choose Create Report. The EPM - Report Editor opens and you can now create the report. 572 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Exercise 20: Create a Dashboard with Live Planning and Consolidation Data Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Set up a dashboard to read live data from Planning and Consolidation Business Example You have users who need a more graphical view of their data in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Task 1: Creating the Design Time Connection 1. Open the Dashboard Designer. 2. Confirm that you have the BPC Data Grid and EPM Connector Add - Ons. Task 2: Build an EPM Report Create a report to read BPC data. 1. Create a Local connection to the Sales Model of your BPC430_## Environment as shown below: Figure 375: Create New OLE DB Data Source 2. In the EPM tab, create a new report as you see below: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 573
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 376: The EPM Report With Dimensions 3. Restrict the axis, row, and column dimensions as follows: Dimension Member Descriptions CATEGORY.CATEORY Current Flash PRODUCT.PARENTH1 Bird Toy Value Pack ENTITY.PARENTH1 Store 17 RPTCURRENCY EURO Key Figures.Key Figures PER (Key Figures) P_ACCT.PARENTH1 Base level members of Personal Costs TIME.PARENTH1 Base level members of 2009.TOTAL Task 3: Create a Line Chart Dashboard 1. Add the line chart to your canvas. You will need it for trending. Continued on next page 574 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration 2. Configure your chart so it appears as shown below: Figure 377: Line Chart Task 4: Create the BPC Data Grid Configure a BPC Data Grid 1. Drag the BPC Data Grid onto your canvas. 2. Configure the BPC Data Grid as shown below: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 575
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 378: Data Grid Properties 3. Save your dashboard Task 5: Create the EPM Connection 1. Insert the report definition in the Excel sheet and then configure the run time connection. 2. Create the EPM Connection 3. Add a refresh button to access the latest data from BPC Task 6: Create The Flash File Create a flash file and then launch it from Internet Explorer and test the refresh feature. 1. 2. Launch your flash file in Internet Explorer. 3. 576 Delete the data in your EPM Report so that you can test the refresh button. Generate the flash file. Add the dashboard into your library. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Solution 20: Create a Dashboard with Live Planning and Consolidation Data Task 1: Creating the Design Time Connection 1. Open the Dashboard Designer. a) From your remote desktop, choose: Start → Programs → Dashboard Design → Dashboard Design Note: If you receive a message regarding Live Office choose Yes The Dashboard Design initial screen opens. b) Under New choose Blank Model When the interface opens, pull the Excel window up so the ribbon appears as shown below: Figure 379: The Designer Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 577
    • Unit 8: Dashboards 2. BPC430 Confirm that you have the BPC Data Grid and EPM Connector Add - Ons. a) Choose File → Manage Add- Ons: Figure 380: Add-On Manager The EPM Connector and BPC Data Grid are available. b) Choose Close Task 2: Build an EPM Report Create a report to read BPC data. 1. Create a Local connection to the Sales Model of your BPC430_## Environment as shown below: Continued on next page 578 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 381: Create New OLE DB Data Source a) Click the EPM tab → Log On b) Next to the Connection field, click the Ellipses(...) button c) Click Create and select Local d) Select SAP BW OLE DB Provider e) Choose Connect f) Goto Start → My Documents → My Documents → BPC430 → BPC430_##. g) Open the Dashboard Connection file. h) Copy the BW Connection: wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp. i) In the Dashboard Designer, paste the BW Connection id into the Application Server field j) Fill in the rest of the fields as shown above. k) Choose Next l) Enter your user id and password to create the connection User ID Password BPC-## training m) Choose Logon n) Select $INFOCUBE o) Choose Finish p) Under Select the cube/model that contains the data you want: select SALES (BPC430_##) (CPMB/__B____//CPMB/TQ2__B____) Hint: The underlines above will contain letters that correspond to the model you are using. See the example below: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 579
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 382: Edit Connection q) Choose OK You are back in the EPM - Connection Manager r) Choose the connection just created. s) Choose OK t) Enter your user id and password to logon User ID BPC-## u) 2. Password training Click Logon In the EPM tab, create a new report as you see below: Continued on next page 580 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 383: The EPM Report With Dimensions a) Place your cursor in cell A1, then click New Report b) Drag the following dimension selections into the Page Axis: Dimension CATEGORY PRODUCT - PARENTH1 ENTITY - PARENTH1 RPTCURRENCY Key Figures Each selection turns into hypertext in the Page Axis Dimensions c) For P_ACCT, drag PARENTH1 into the Row Axis Dimensions P_ACCT.PARENTH1 in blue hypertext appears in the row axis dimension d) For Time, drag PARENTH1 into the Column Axis Dimensions Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 581
    • Unit 8: Dashboards 3. BPC430 Restrict the axis, row, and column dimensions as follows: Dimension Member Descriptions CATEGORY.CATEORY Current Flash PRODUCT.PARENTH1 Bird Toy Value Pack ENTITY.PARENTH1 Store 17 RPTCURRENCY EURO Key Figures.Key Figures PER (Key Figures) P_ACCT.PARENTH1 Base level members of Personal Costs TIME.PARENTH1 Base level members of 2009.TOTAL a) Choose each hypertext in the Page Axis, and select the members as shown above b) Choose the P_ACCT.PARENTH1 hypertext The EPM - Member Selector pops up. c) Switch the display to Key d) Select CE0004000 - Personal Costs → Base Level e) Transfer to Selected Members f) Remove any other selections g) Choose OK h) Choose the TIME.PARENTH1 hypertext The EPM - Member Selector pops up. i) Switch the display to Key j) Select the Base Level members of 2009.TOTAL using the same technique as above. k) Choose OK l) Choose OK You should have data as shown below: Continued on next page 582 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 384: The Data In Excel Task 3: Create a Line Chart Dashboard 1. Add the line chart to your canvas. You will need it for trending. a) b) 2. On the upper left in Components →Tree → Charts Drag Line Chart onto the canvas Configure your chart so it appears as shown below: Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 583
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 385: Line Chart a) With the chart selected Right click → Properties Chart properties appear on the right. Hint: Choose Auto Hide (it looks like a pin) to either keep the property window open all the time or only when chosen. b) Select By Series c) Above Category Labels(X) choose + Series 1 is created. d) Next to the Name field, use the selection icon to select A8 and choose OK e) Next to the Values(Y): field, use the selection icon to select B8:M8 and choose OK Figure 386: Series 1 f) g) Next to the Name field, use the selection icon to select A9 and choose OK h) 584 Above Category Labels(X) choose + Next to the Values(Y): field, use the selection icon to select B9:M9 and choose OK Continued on next page © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration i) Above Category Labels(X) choose + j) Next to the Name field, use the selection icon to select A10 and choose OK k) Next to the Values(Y): field, use the selection icon to select B10:M10 and choose OK l) Choose Appearance → Text → Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels m) Under Format Selected Text enter a font size of 11 The month numbers under the trend chart are now upright. Task 4: Create the BPC Data Grid Configure a BPC Data Grid 1. Drag the BPC Data Grid onto your canvas. a) Under Tree → Add-Ons, drag the BPC Data Grid to the canvas under the chart: b) Choose the grid item Figure 387: Grid Properties You can view its properties on the right. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 585
    • Unit 8: Dashboards 2. BPC430 Configure the BPC Data Grid as shown below: Continued on next page 586 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 388: Data Grid Properties a) Next to Header Data select A7:M7 and choose OK b) Next to the Row properties: detail data select A8:M10 and choose OK c) Select Hide empty rows d) Close the grid properties. Figure 389: Chart and Grid in Build Mode The BPC Data Grid is displayed under the chart. 3. Save your dashboard a) Choose File → Save as → Enter: DashBoard## → Save Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 587
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Task 5: Create the EPM Connection 1. Insert the report definition in the Excel sheet and then configure the run time connection. a) In A14 choose the Excel Insert function → Select category FPMXL Client.Technical Category → GetReportDefinition Figure 390: Get Report Definition b) Choose OK The function is displayed. c) Choose OK Now the EPM Connection will be able to access the report definition from cell A14. Continued on next page 588 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration 2. Create the EPM Connection a) Goto Data → Connections The Data Manager opens b) Choose Add → EPM Connector Connection 1 is generated. c) Select the Application: Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP NetWeaver platform d) Select the Operation: EPM Report e) In the web client, choose Documents → Connection Data → Open f) Copy the Dashboard Connection: http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080 g) Paste it into the open field below Input Details h) Next to Report Definition choose Retrieve from one Excel Cell and select A14 → OK Figure 391: Run Time Connection The report meta data is fed into the screen as shown above. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 589
    • Unit 8: Dashboards 3. BPC430 Add a refresh button to access the latest data from BPC a) In the Tree (on the left) expand Web Connectivity b) Drag the Connection Refresh Button to the right of the chart as shown below: Figure 392: Position Refresh Button c) In the Connection Refresh Button properties → Select the Name checkbox: The refresh button is configured. d) Choose File → Save Continued on next page 590 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Task 6: Create The Flash File Create a flash file and then launch it from Internet Explorer and test the refresh feature. 1. Delete the data in your EPM Report so that you can test the refresh button. Generate the flash file. a) Delete the transaction data in B8:M10 b) Choose File → Export → Flash(SWF) → My Documents → BPC430 → BPC430_## → DashBoard## → Save Note: If you receive an error message regarding Unsupported Excel Functions choose OK c) Do not close your Dashboard Designer. (you may need to make a change later) Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 591
    • Unit 8: Dashboards 2. BPC430 Launch your flash file in Internet Explorer. a) Choose Start → My Documents → My Documents → BPC430 → BPC430_## → DashBoard##.swf b) Choose Refresh c) Log on User ID Password BPC-## training You have refreshed the data grid and chart from Internet Explorer. Figure 393: Launched from the Web d) 3. Close the Internet Explorer session. Add the dashboard into your library. a) In the web client, choose the Home tab Libary → Public b) Select New → Dashboard c) Make the following selections: Continued on next page 592 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Figure 394: Library Upload Selections d) Choose Upload e) Select Refresh f) Under Name choose Dashboard## After a few seconds, an additional tab is created Dashboard## g) Next to the chart, choose Refresh Your data should appear using your current log in. Continued on next page 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 593
    • Unit 8: Dashboards BPC430 Figure 395: Launched From the Library h) i) 594 Close the Dashboard## tab When prompted to save your changes, choose No © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 2011
    • BPC430 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Integration Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the key features of an SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard • Create a new dashboard • Use the EPM Connector Related Information You will find some very detailed help documentation at HELP.SAP.COM. Follow this path: SAP BusinessObjects → EPM Solutions → Planning and Consolidation → SAP BusinessObjects EPM Solutions, add-in for Microsoft Offcie 10.0 2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. SAP Class Week of April 16, 2012 595
    • Unit Summary BPC430 Unit Summary You should now be able to: